Compare commits

..

165 Commits

Author SHA1 Message Date
Phil Elwell
41a5ce7cdf Merge pull request #960 from pranith/rpi-4.0.y
vchiq: Fix wrong condition check
2015-05-08 17:12:42 +01:00
Pranith Kumar
c7f63111ea vchiq: Fix wrong condition check
The log level is checked from within the log call. Remove the check in the call.

Signed-off-by: Pranith Kumar <bobby.prani@gmail.com>
2015-05-07 17:48:27 -04:00
popcornmix
fe2ea3e054 bcm2835-mmc: Add locks when accessing sdhost registers 2015-05-05 23:06:57 +01:00
popcornmix
b8a19a3a52 Revert "bcm2835-mmc: Add range of debug options for slowing things down"
This reverts commit f36bd72cd2.
2015-05-05 23:03:28 +01:00
popcornmix
4c0553ea01 Revert "bcm2835-mmc: Add option to disable MMC_QUIRK_BLK_NO_CMD23"
This reverts commit 497dbba490.
2015-05-05 23:01:44 +01:00
popcornmix
3fefacdc8e Revert "bcm2835-mmc: Default to disabling MMC_QUIRK_BLK_NO_CMD23"
This reverts commit 488911bc7c.
2015-05-05 23:01:39 +01:00
popcornmix
a52246c79a Revert "bcm2835-mmc: Add option to disable some delays"
This reverts commit d2a4b3ddb4.
2015-05-05 23:00:28 +01:00
popcornmix
95ae72d689 Revert "bcm2835-mmc: Add option to disable delays on some writeb calls"
This reverts commit aa6b3e63fa.
2015-05-05 23:00:19 +01:00
popcornmix
73f24007e9 Revert "bcm2835-mmc: warn on accesses without spinlock"
This reverts commit 39315a8ea7.
2015-05-05 23:00:10 +01:00
popcornmix
a7865cec51 Revert "bcm2835-mmc: Add locks when accessing sdhost registers"
This reverts commit 547b7363c0.
2015-05-05 23:00:01 +01:00
Peter Kümmel
cb97407b94 8192cu: CONFIG_AP_MODE hardcoded in autoconf.h 2015-05-05 15:37:27 +01:00
Christopher Freeman
cb9d41ece0 dmaengine: increment privatecnt when using dma_get_any_slave_channel
Channels allocated via dma_get_any_slave_channel were not increasing
the counter tracking private allocations.  When these channels were
released, privatecnt may erroneously fall to zero.  The DMA device
would then lose its DMA_PRIVATE cap and fail to allocate future private
channels (via private_candidate) as any allocations still outstanding
would incorrectly be seen as public allocations.

Signed-off-by: Christopher Freeman <cfreeman@nvidia.com>
Signed-off-by: Vinod Koul <vinod.koul@intel.com>
2015-05-05 15:23:49 +01:00
popcornmix
121d87c832 squash: bcm2709: Fix build with SYSTEM_TIMER defined 2015-05-05 15:19:58 +01:00
popcornmix
ef2659470b squash: dwc_otg: Allow to build without SMP 2015-05-05 15:19:57 +01:00
popcornmix
12149d45fa squash: entry_macro: Allow to build without SMP 2015-05-05 15:19:57 +01:00
popcornmix
a80e690cd5 squash: bcm2709: Allow to build without SMP 2015-05-05 15:19:56 +01:00
popcornmix
75c5da712b Merge pull request #954 from pelwell/rpi-4.0.y
bcm2835-mmc/sdhost: of_dma_request_slave_channel isn't exported
2015-05-05 15:19:23 +01:00
Phil Elwell
503ce7c5d4 bcm2835-mmc/sdhost: of_dma_request_slave_channel isn't exported...
of_dma_request_slave_channel isn't an exported function, so can't be
used from within a module. Replace with dma_request_slave_channel,
which calls the of_ variant but IS exported.

See: https://github.com/raspberrypi/linux/issues/952

Signed-off-by: Phil Elwell <phil@raspberrypi.org>
2015-05-05 15:03:59 +01:00
Phil Elwell
fdc5e42967 squash: sdhost support for faster core clocks, and force-pio mode 2015-05-01 18:38:04 +01:00
popcornmix
547b7363c0 bcm2835-mmc: Add locks when accessing sdhost registers 2015-05-01 18:35:38 +01:00
popcornmix
39315a8ea7 bcm2835-mmc: warn on accesses without spinlock 2015-05-01 17:46:56 +01:00
popcornmix
aa6b3e63fa bcm2835-mmc: Add option to disable delays on some writeb calls 2015-05-01 17:46:16 +01:00
popcornmix
67fd2c5af2 vchiq: Allocation does not need to be atomic 2015-05-01 15:32:32 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
2e7d6a25e8 bcm2835: Change to use bcm2835-mmc in Device Tree
Use downstream bcm2835-mmc driver to get increased throughput
and DMA support.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:32:31 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
5f6edf81df bcm2835: bcm2835_defconfig enable MMC_BCM2835
Enable the downstream bcm2835-mmc driver and DMA support.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:32:30 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
a7be6fff3d mmc: bcm2835-mmc: Make available on ARCH_BCM2835
Make the bcm2835-mmc driver available for use on ARCH_BCM2835.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:32:29 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
4e2b210eeb bcm2835: bcm2835_defconfig
Some options in bcm2835_defconfig are now the default and
some have changed. Update to keep functionality.

No longer available: SCSI_MULTI_LUN and RESOURCE_COUNTERS.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:32:29 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
757e5f795c BCM270x: Remove dmaman device
Remove the dmaman device since the dmaengine now handles
the legacy API manager.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:32:28 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
0e5fbba02c BCM270x: dma: Remove driver
Remove dma.c driver which is now merged with bcm2708-dmaengine.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:32:27 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
c738deeab4 dmaengine: bcm2708: Merge with arch dma.c driver and disable dma.c
Merge the legacy DMA API driver with bcm2708-dmaengine.
This is done so we can use bcm2708_fb on ARCH_BCM2835 (mailbox
driver is also needed).

Changes to the dma.c code:
- Use BIT() macro.
- Cutdown some comments to one line.
- Add mutex to vc_dmaman and use this, since the dev lock is locked
  during probing of the engine part.
- Add global g_dmaman variable since drvdata is used by the engine part.
- Restructure for readability:
  vc_dmaman_chan_alloc()
  vc_dmaman_chan_free()
  bcm_dma_chan_free()
- Restructure bcm_dma_chan_alloc() to simplify error handling.
- Use device irq resources instead of hardcoded bcm_dma_irqs table.
- Remove dev_dmaman_register() and code it directly.
- Remove dev_dmaman_deregister() and code it directly.
- Simplify bcm_dmaman_probe() using devm_* functions.
- Get dmachans from DT if available.
- Keep 'dma.dmachans' module argument name for backwards compatibility.

Make it available on ARCH_BCM2835 as well.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:32:26 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
d0ad183e75 BCM270x: Add memory and irq resources to dmaengine device and DT
Prepare for merging of the legacy DMA API arch driver dma.c
with bcm2708-dmaengine by adding memory and irq resources both
to platform file device and Device Tree node.
Don't use BCM_DMAMAN_DRIVER_NAME so we don't have to include mach/dma.h

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:32:25 +01:00
Phil Elwell
da9969b245 Adding bcm2835-sdhost driver, and an overlay to enable it
BCM2835 has two SD card interfaces. This driver uses the other one.
2015-05-01 15:17:59 +01:00
Phil Elwell
ff0caccc60 Add blk_pos parameter to mmc multi_io_quirk callback 2015-05-01 15:17:55 +01:00
popcornmix
488911bc7c bcm2835-mmc: Default to disabling MMC_QUIRK_BLK_NO_CMD23 2015-05-01 15:17:54 +01:00
popcornmix
d2a4b3ddb4 bcm2835-mmc: Add option to disable some delays 2015-05-01 15:17:53 +01:00
Peter Kümmel
4c864893b1 8192cu needs old wireless extensions
The obsolete WIRELESS_EXT configuration is used
by the old Realtek code and is needed for AP support.
2015-05-01 15:17:53 +01:00
popcornmix
497dbba490 bcm2835-mmc: Add option to disable MMC_QUIRK_BLK_NO_CMD23 2015-05-01 15:17:52 +01:00
popcornmix
5aac453ca2 bcm2708-dmaengine: Add debug options 2015-05-01 15:17:51 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
5e29e90fd3 HiFiBerry Digi: set SPDIF status bits for sample rate
The HiFiBerry Digi driver did not signal the sample rate in the SPDIF status bits.
While this is optional, some DACs and receivers do not accept this signal. This patch
adds the sample rate bits in the SPDIF status block.
2015-05-01 15:17:50 +01:00
popcornmix
e2a06a85f9 smsc95xx: Disable turbo mode by default 2015-05-01 15:17:49 +01:00
Steve Glendinning
6b23b3c1fd smsx95xx: fix crimes against truesize
smsc95xx is adjusting truesize when it shouldn't, and following a recent patch from Eric this is now triggering warnings.

This patch stops smsc95xx from changing truesize.

Signed-off-by: Steve Glendinning <steve.glendinning@smsc.com>
2015-05-01 15:17:48 +01:00
Martin Sperl
49bbfbdf10 spi: bcm2835: change timeout of polling driver to 1s
The way that the timeout code is written in the polling function
the timeout does also trigger when interrupted or rescheduled while
in the polling loop.

This patch changes the timeout from effectively 20ms (=2 jiffies) to
1 second and removes the time that the transfer really takes out of
the computation, as - per design - this is <30us and the jiffie resolution
is 10ms so that does not make any difference what so ever.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:47 +01:00
Martin Sperl
e45ccf9253 spi: bcm2835: enabling polling mode for transfers shorter than 30us
In cases of short transfer times the CPU is spending lots of time
in the interrupt handler and scheduler to reschedule the worker thread.

Measurements show that we have times where it takes 29.32us to between
the last clock change and the time that the worker-thread is running again
returning from wait_for_completion_timeout().

During this time the interrupt-handler is running calling complete()
and then also the scheduler is rescheduling the worker thread.

This time can vary depending on how much of the code is still in
CPU-caches, when there is a burst of spi transfers the subsequent delays
are in the order of 25us, so the value of 30us seems reasonable.

With polling the whole transfer of 4 bytes at 10MHz finishes after 6.16us
(CS down to up) with the real transfer (clock running) taking 3.56us.
So the efficiency has much improved and is also freeing CPU cycles,
reducing interrupts and context switches.

Because of the above 30us seems to be a reasonable limit for polling.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:46 +01:00
Martin Sperl
53bdf60401 spi: bcm2835: transform native-cs to gpio-cs on first spi_setup
Transforms the bcm-2835 native SPI-chip select to their gpio-cs equivalent.

This allows for some support of some optimizations that are not
possible due to HW-gliches on the CS line - especially filling
the FIFO before enabling SPI interrupts (by writing to CS register)
while the transfer is already in progress (See commit: e3a2be3030)

This patch also works arround some issues in bcm2835-pinctrl which does not
set the value when setting the GPIO as output - it just sets up output and
(typically) leaves the GPIO as low.  When a fix for this is merged then this
gpio_set_value can get removed from bcm2835_spi_setup.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:45 +01:00
Martin Sperl
37f9415e2b spi: bcm2835: fill FIFO before enabling interrupts to reduce interrupts/message
To reduce the number of interrupts/message we fill the FIFO before
enabling interrupts - for short messages this reduces the interrupt count
from 2 to 1 interrupt.

There have been rare cases where short (<200ns) chip-select switches with
native CS have been observed during such operation, this is why this
optimization is only enabled for GPIO-CS.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Tested-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:44 +01:00
Martin Sperl
a6eb700e27 spi: bcm2835: fix code formatting issue
Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Tested-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:43 +01:00
Martin Sperl
941e9c41fb spi: bcm2835: move to the transfer_one driver model
This also allows for GPIO-CS to get used removing the limitation of
2/3 SPI devises on the SPI bus.

Fixes: spi-cs-high with native CS with multiple devices on the spi-bus
resetting the chip selects to "normal" polarity after a finished
transfer.

No other functionality/improvements added.

Tested with the following 4 devices on the spi-bus:
* mcp2515 with native CS
* mcp2515 with gpio CS
* fb_st7735r with native CS
    (plus spi-cs-high via transistor inverting polarity)
* enc28j60 with gpio-CS
Tested-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:42 +01:00
Martin Sperl
dfc9858b6b spi: bcm2835: enable support of 3-wire mode
Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:41 +01:00
Martin Sperl
ef109c1aa5 spi: bcm2835: clock divider can be a multiple of 2
The official documentation is wrong in this respect.
Has been tested empirically for dividers 2-1024

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:40 +01:00
Martin Sperl
9520a8428a spi: bcm2835: fill/drain SPI-fifo as much as possible during interrupt
Implement the recommendation from the BCM2835 data-sheet
with regards to polling drivers to fill/drain the FIFO as much data as possible
also for the interrupt-driven case (which this driver is making use of).

This means that for long transfers (>64bytes) we need one interrupt
every 64 bytes instead of every 12 bytes, as the FIFO is 16 words (not bytes) wide.

Tested with mcp251x (can bus), fb_st7735 (TFT framebuffer device)
and enc28j60 (ethernet) drivers.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:40 +01:00
Martin Sperl
c81f2f73fe spi: bcm2835: fix all checkpath --strict messages
The following errors/warnings issued by checkpatch.pl --strict have been fixed:
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:182: CHECK: Alignment should match open parenthesis
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:191: CHECK: braces {} should be used on all arms of this statement
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:234: CHECK: Alignment should match open parenthesis
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:256: CHECK: Alignment should match open parenthesis
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:271: CHECK: Alignment should match open parenthesis
drivers/spi/spi-bcm2835.c:346: CHECK: Alignment should match open parenthesis
total: 0 errors, 0 warnings, 6 checks, 403 lines checked

In 2 locations the arguments had to get split/moved to the next line so that the
line width stays below 80 chars.

Signed-off-by: Martin Sperl <kernel@martin.sperl.org>
Signed-off-by: Mark Brown <broonie@kernel.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:39 +01:00
popcornmix
f36bd72cd2 bcm2835-mmc: Add range of debug options for slowing things down 2015-05-01 15:17:38 +01:00
Jakub Kicinski
9d99e3183e bcm2708: fix uart1 parameters
System clock is 250MHz, but the device uses a non-standard
oversampling rate (8 instead of 16) hence the clock rate
has to be multiplied by 16/8 = 2.  Currently the clock
rate seems to be divided by 2.

Also correct the .type and .flags.

Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kubakici@wp.pl>
2015-05-01 15:17:37 +01:00
popcornmix
b623558975 config: Add default configs 2015-05-01 15:17:36 +01:00
Clive Messer
c4d32dd8e8 Add Device Tree support for RPi-DAC. 2015-05-01 15:17:35 +01:00
Waldemar Brodkorb
cfb7979048 Add driver for rpi-proto
Forward port of 3.10.x driver from https://github.com/koalo
We are using a custom board and would like to use rpi 3.18.x
kernel. Patch works fine for our embedded system.

URL to the audio chip:
http://www.mikroe.com/add-on-boards/audio-voice/audio-codec-proto/

Playback tested with devicetree enabled.

Signed-off-by: Waldemar Brodkorb <wbrodkorb@conet.de>
2015-05-01 15:17:34 +01:00
Phil Elwell
c4e46a88eb BCM270x_DT: Refactor bcm2708.dtsi and bcm2709.dtsi
Extract the common elements, creating bcm2708_common.dtsi
2015-05-01 15:17:33 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
5bd50eacb5 BCM270x_DT: add bcm2835-mmc entry
Add Device Tree entry for bcm2835-mmc.
In non-DT mode, don't add the device in the board file.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:32 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
8bf4bde8c8 bcm270x: add mmc-bcm2835 clock
Add clock for the mmc-bcm2835.0 device.
Will be used in non-DT mode.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:31 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
f65dc605f7 BCM270x_DT: add bcm2835-dma entry
Add Device Tree entry for bcm2835-dma.
The entry doesn't contain any resources since they are handled
by the arch/arm/mach-bcm270x/dma.c driver.
In non-DT mode, don't add the device in the board file.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:31 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
3cd0c5268c dts: overlay: rpi-display: pullup irq gpio
An early version of rpi-display needs the touch controller irq
to be pulled up. This is the version with 9-bit SPI as default.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:30 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
e242a6168a dts: overlay: piscreen: set speed to 24MHz
Some of the displays can't handle the 32MHz speed.
Lower the default speed to 24MHz.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:29 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
962f055d35 dts: overlay: add support for MZ61581 display
Add Device Tree overlay for MZ61581 display by Tontec.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:28 +01:00
Martin Sperl
db632c4852 enable compiling spi-bcm2835 and add overlay to allow us to load the driver 2015-05-01 15:17:27 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
1f2eb975fb dts: overlay: add support for Adafruit PiTFT
Add DT overlay for the Adafruit PiTFT 2.8" resistive touch screen

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:26 +01:00
Phil Elwell
7d5e61de5f enc28j60: Add device tree compatible string and an overlay 2015-05-01 15:17:25 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
712e74ab35 dts: overlay: add support for PiScreen display
Add Device Tree overlay for PiScreen display by OzzMaker.com

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:24 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
3319258136 dts: overlay: add support for HY28B display
Add Device Tree overlay for HY28B display by HAOYU Electronics.
Default values are set to match Texy's display shield.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:24 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
85f41ebf84 dts: overlay: add support for HY28A display
Add Device Tree overlay for HY28A display by HAOYU Electronics.
Default values are set to match Texy's display shield.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:23 +01:00
Noralf Trønnes
c667acb84f dts: overlay: add support for rpi-display
Add Device Tree overlay for rpi-display by Watterott.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:17:22 +01:00
Jon Burgess
04fa1b67cc Create generic i2c-rtc overlay for supporting ds1307, ds3231, pcf2127 and pcf8523.
Signed-off-by: Jon Burgess <jburgess777@gmail.com>
2015-05-01 15:17:21 +01:00
Dave Martin
103c9b4d22 serial/amba-pl011: Refactor and simplify TX FIFO handling
Commit 734745c serial/amba-pl011: Activate TX IRQ passively
adds some complexity and overhead in the form of a softirq
mechanism for transmitting in the absence of interrupts.

This patch simplifies the code flow to reduce the reliance on
subtle behaviour and avoid fragility under future maintenance.

To this end, the TX softirq mechanism is removed and instead
pl011_start_tx() will now simply stuff the FIFO until full
(guaranteeing future TX IRQs), or until there are no more chars
to write (in which case we don't care whether an IRQ happens).

Signed-off-by: Dave Martin <Dave.Martin@xxxxxxx>
Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kubakici@xxxxx>
2015-05-01 15:17:20 +01:00
Dave Martin
97ee564535 serial/amba-pl011: Activate TX IRQ passively
The current PL011 driver transmits a dummy character when the UART
is opened, to assert the TX IRQ for the first time
(see pl011_startup()).  The UART is put in loopback mode temporarily,
so the receiver presumably shouldn't see anything.

However...

At least some platforms containing a PL011 send characters down the
wire even when loopback mode is enabled.  This means that a
spurious NUL character may be seen at the receiver when the PL011 is
opened through the TTY layer.

The current code also temporarily sets the baud rate to maximum and
the character width to the minimum, to that the dummy TX completes
as quickly as possible.  If this is seen by the receiver it will
result in a framing error and can knock the receiver out of sync --
turning subsequent output into garbage until synchronisation
is reestablished.  (Particularly problematic during boot with systemd.)

To avoid spurious transmissions, this patch removes assumptions about
whether the TX IRQ will fire until at least one TX IRQ has been seen.

Instead, the UART will unmask the TX IRQ and then slow-start via
polling and timer-based soft IRQs initially.  If the TTY layer writes
enough data to fill the FIFO to the interrupt threshold in one go,
the TX IRQ should assert, at which point the driver changes to
fully interrupt-driven TX.

In this way, the TX IRQ is activated as a side-effect instead of
being done deliberately.

This should also mean that the driver works on the SBSA Generic
UART[1] (a cut-down PL011) without invasive changes.  The Generic
UART lacks some features needed for the dummy TX approach to work
(FIFO disabling and loopback).

[1] Server Base System Architecture (ARM-DEN-0029-v2.3)
    http://infocenter.arm.com/
    (click-thru required :/)

Signed-off-by: Dave Martin <Dave.Martin@xxxxxxx>
2015-05-01 15:17:19 +01:00
Phil Elwell
f84f3792f8 pinctrl-bcm2835: Only request the interrupts listed in the DTB
Although the GPIO controller can generate three interrupts (four counting
the common one), the device tree files currently only specify two. In the
absence of the third, simply don't register that interrupt (as opposed to
registering 0), which has the effect of making it impossible to generate
interrupts for GPIOs 46-53 which, since they share pins with the SD card
interface, is unlikely to be a problem.
2015-05-01 15:17:18 +01:00
Phil Elwell
6f6691ec5a pinctrl-bcm2835: Fix interrupt handling for GPIOs 28-31 and 46-53
Contrary to the documentation, the BCM2835 GPIO controller actually has
four interrupt lines - one each for the three IRQ groups and one common. Rather
confusingly, the GPIO interrupt groups don't correspond directly with the GPIO
control banks. Instead, GPIOs 0-27 generate IRQ GPIO0, 28-45 GPIO1 and
46-53 GPIO2.

Awkwardly, the GPIOS for IRQ GPIO1 straddle two 32-entry GPIO banks, so it is
cleaner to split out a function to process the interrupts for a single GPIO
bank.

This bug has only just been observed because GPIOs above 27 can only be
accessed on an old Raspberry Pi with the optional P5 header fitted, where
the pins are often used for I2S instead.
2015-05-01 15:17:17 +01:00
Rainer Herbers
1054dcb8e6 Create bmp085_i2c-sensor-overlay.dts and update Makefile 2015-05-01 15:17:16 +01:00
Phil Elwell
1d773d31a5 Fix LED "input" trigger implementation for 3.19 2015-05-01 15:17:16 +01:00
jeanleflambeur
e42746b1c9 Fix grabbing lock from atomic context in i2c driver
2 main changes:
- check for timeouts in the bcm2708_bsc_setup function as indicated by this comment:
      /* poll for transfer start bit (should only take 1-20 polls) */
  This implies that the setup function can now fail so account for this everywhere it's called
- Removed the clk_get_rate call from inside the setup function as it locks a mutex and that's not ok since we call it from under a spin lock.

removed dead code and update comment

fixed typo in comment
2015-05-01 15:17:15 +01:00
android
604eef02f1 BCM2708_VCIO : Add automatic creation of device node 2015-05-01 15:17:14 +01:00
Byron Bradley
6c1a859165 Add device-tree overlay for pcf2127
Signed-off-by: Byron Bradley <byronb@afterthoughtsoftware.com>
2015-05-01 15:17:13 +01:00
Phil Elwell
0ef85a9dc0 i2c_bcm2708: Fix clock reference counting 2015-05-01 15:17:12 +01:00
Phil Elwell
7ea41787ab w1-gpio: Sort out the pullup/parasitic power tangle 2015-05-01 15:17:11 +01:00
Phil Elwell
9ca7fc789a pinctrl-bcm2835: bcm2835_gpio_direction_output must set the value 2015-05-01 15:17:10 +01:00
Phil Elwell
913d3a3c76 BCM270x_DT: Add i2c0_baudrate and i2c1_baudrate parameters 2015-05-01 15:17:09 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
5bb524a3e3 HiFiBerry Amp: fix device-tree problems
Some code to load the driver based on device-tree-overlays was missing. This is added by this patch.
2015-05-01 15:17:08 +01:00
popcornmix
ec616ff69f bcm2709: Simplify and strip down IRQ handler 2015-05-01 15:17:07 +01:00
Phil Elwell
21a00874bd BCM270x_DT: Add pwr_led, and the required "input" trigger
The "input" trigger makes the associated GPIO an input.  This is to support
the Raspberry Pi PWR LED, which is driven by external hardware in normal use.

N.B. pwr_led is not available on Model A or B boards.
2015-05-01 15:17:07 +01:00
Ryan Coe
c29e2b5781 Add device-tree overlay for ds1307
Signed-off-by: Ryan Coe <bluemrp9@gmail.com>
2015-05-01 15:17:06 +01:00
Ryan Coe
79e41e4a63 Update ds1307 driver for device-tree support
Signed-off-by: Ryan Coe <bluemrp9@gmail.com>
2015-05-01 15:17:05 +01:00
Joerg Hohensohn
d1b18954b2 bugfix for 32kHz sample rate, was missing 2015-05-01 15:17:04 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
8b09a2b295 Add a parameter to turn off SPDIF output if no audio is playing
This patch adds the paramater auto_shutdown_output to the kernel module.
Default behaviour of the module is the same, but when auto_shutdown_output
is set to 1, the SPDIF oputput will shutdown if no stream is playing.
2015-05-01 15:17:03 +01:00
Phil Elwell
67b07b343f BCM2708_DT: Add pcf8523-rtc overlay 2015-05-01 15:17:02 +01:00
Serge Schneider
b85ff8bd83 I2C: Only register the I2C device for the current board revision 2015-05-01 15:17:01 +01:00
Timo Kokkonen
fc55e032dd Added support to reserve/enable a GPIO pin to be used from pps-gpio module (LinuxPPS). Enable PPS modules in default config for RPi. 2015-05-01 15:17:00 +01:00
Phil Elwell
231e60fed4 Add pps-gpio DT overlay
Parameters:
    gpiopin=<input pin>    // Default 18
2015-05-01 15:16:59 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
04543b4caa Add device tree overlay for HiFiBerry Amp/Amp+
This patch add the missing device tree file for the HiFiBerry Amp and Amp+ boards.
2015-05-01 15:16:58 +01:00
Phil Elwell
0b07678de5 BCM2708_DT: Build the overlays as well 2015-05-01 15:16:57 +01:00
Phil Elwell
c70c2040d0 scripts/dtc: Update to upstream version with overlay patches 2015-05-01 15:16:56 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
f24e351f43 TAS5713: return error if initialisation fails
Existing TAS5713 driver logs errors during initialisation, but does not return
an error code. Therefore even if initialisation fails, the driver will still be
loaded, but won't work. This patch fixes this. I2C communication error will now
reported correctly by a non-zero return code.
2015-05-01 15:16:55 +01:00
Phil Elwell
f12459c4b2 Adding w1-gpio device tree overlays
N.B. Requires firmware supporting multi-target overrides

w1-gpio-overlay:
  Use if a pullup pin is not required.
  Parameters:
    gpiopin=<i/o pin>     // default 4

w1-gpio-pullup-overlay:
  Use if a pullup pin is required.
  Parameters:
    gpiopin=<i/o pin>     // default 4
    pullup=<pullup pin>   // default 5
2015-05-01 15:16:54 +01:00
Phil Elwell
d93c40a747 Fix the activity LED in DT mode
Add a "leds" node to the base DTBs, and a subnode for the activity
LED. You can change the LED function like this:

  dtparam=act_led_trigger=heartbeat

Add aliases for the other main nodes (soc, intc).

Issue: linux #757
2015-05-01 15:16:54 +01:00
Phil Elwell
c4afc4f595 lirc-rpi: Add device tree support, and a suitable overlay
The overlay supports DT parameters that match the old module
parameters, except that gpio_in_pull should be set using the
strings "up", "down" or "off".

lirc-rpi: Also support pinctrl-bcm2835 in non-DT mode
2015-05-01 15:16:53 +01:00
Phil Elwell
66958bd53e DT: Add overrides to enable i2c0, i2c1, spi and i2s 2015-05-01 15:16:52 +01:00
Phil Elwell
fa54f49c23 fdt: Add support for the CONFIG_CMDLINE_EXTEND option 2015-05-01 15:16:51 +01:00
popcornmix
1af7b4b793 Adding Device Tree support for some RPi audio cards 2015-05-01 15:16:50 +01:00
Phil Elwell
9030436787 bcm2708: Allow option card devices to be configured via DT
If the kernel is built with Device Tree support, and if a DT blob
is provided for the kernel at boot time, then the platform devices
for option cards are not created. This avoids both the need to
blacklist unwanted devices, and the need to update the board
support code with each new device.
2015-05-01 15:16:49 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
a7e71af109 Added driver for HiFiBerry Amp amplifier add-on board
The driver contains a low-level hardware driver for the TAS5713 and the
drivers for the Raspberry Pi I2S subsystem.
2015-05-01 15:16:48 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
2b376efb3a Added support for HiFiBerry DAC+
The driver is based on the HiFiBerry DAC driver. However HiFiBerry DAC+ uses
a different codec chip (PCM5122), therefore a new driver is necessary.
2015-05-01 15:16:47 +01:00
popcornmix
d2a00394bb Revert "ARM: dma: Use dma_pfn_offset for dma address translation"
This reverts commit 6ce0d20016.
2015-05-01 15:16:46 +01:00
P33M
9d7ac0e308 usb: core: make overcurrent messages more prominent
Hub overcurrent messages are more serious than "debug". Increase loglevel.
2015-05-01 15:16:45 +01:00
popcornmix
7708377b70 hid: Reduce default mouse polling interval to 60Hz
Reduces overhead when using X
2015-05-01 15:16:44 +01:00
notro
c04316c256 i2c: bcm2708: add device tree support
Add DT support to driver and add to .dtsi file.
Setup pins in .dts file.
i2c is disabled by default.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

bcm2708: don't register i2c controllers when using DT

The devices for the i2c controllers are in the Device Tree.
Only register devices when not using DT.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

i2c: bcm2835: make driver available on ARCH_BCM2708

Make this driver available on ARCH_BCM2708

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:16:43 +01:00
notro
16b8124e21 spi: bcm2708: add device tree support
Add DT support to driver and add to .dtsi file.
Setup pins and spidev in .dts file.
SPI is disabled by default.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

BCM2708: don't register SPI controller when using DT

The device for the SPI controller is in the Device Tree.
Only register the device when not using DT.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

spi: bcm2835: make driver available on ARCH_BCM2708

Make this driver available on ARCH_BCM2708

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

bcm2708: Remove the prohibition on mixing SPIDEV and DT
2015-05-01 15:16:42 +01:00
notro
d41a10ba93 BCM2708: use pinctrl-bcm2835
Use pinctrl-bcm2835 instead of the pinctrl-bcm2708 and bcm2708_gpio
combination.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:16:41 +01:00
popcornmix
6c9eeae1a0 BCM2708: armctrl: Add IRQ Device Tree support
Add Device Tree IRQ support for BCM2708.
Usage is the same as for irq-bcm2835.
See binding document: brcm,bcm2835-armctrl-ic.txt

A bank 3 is added to handle GPIO interrupts. This is done because
armctrl also handles GPIO interrupts.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

BCM2708: armctrl: remove irq bank 3

irq bank 3 was needed by the pinctrl-bcm2708 and bcm2708_gpio
combination. It is no longer required.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:16:41 +01:00
popcornmix
918b734bf6 vmstat: Workaround for issue where dirty page count goes negative
See:
https://github.com/raspberrypi/linux/issues/617
http://www.spinics.net/lists/linux-mm/msg72236.html
2015-05-01 15:16:40 +01:00
Howard Mitchell
809f7a7f45 Set a limit of 0dB on Digital Volume Control
The main volume control in the PCM512x DAC has a range up to
+24dB. This is dangerously loud and can potentially cause massive
clipping in the output stages. Therefore this sets a sensible
limit of 0dB for this control.
2015-05-01 15:16:39 +01:00
Gordon Garrity
2624db9402 Add IQaudIO Sound Card support for Raspberry Pi 2015-05-01 15:16:38 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
fcd7621107 ASoC: wm8804: Set idle_bias_off to false Idle bias has been change to remove warning on driver startup
Signed-off-by: Daniel Matuschek <daniel@matuschek.net>
2015-05-01 15:16:37 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
407d23d8a4 BCM2708: Added support for HiFiBerry Digi board Board initalization by I2C
Signed-off-by: Daniel Matuschek <daniel@matuschek.net>
2015-05-01 15:16:36 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
aa032227a1 ASoC: BCM:Add support for HiFiBerry Digi. Driver is based on the patched WM8804 driver.
Signed-off-by: Daniel Matuschek <daniel@matuschek.net>
2015-05-01 15:16:35 +01:00
Daniel Matuschek
76bd7ab96d ASoC: wm8804: Implement MCLK configuration options, add 32bit support WM8804 can run with PLL frequencies of 256xfs and 128xfs for most sample rates. At 192kHz only 128xfs is supported. The existing driver selects 128xfs automatically for some lower samples rates. By using an additional mclk_div divider, it is now possible to control the behaviour. This allows using 256xfs PLL frequency on all sample rates up to 96kHz. It should allow lower jitter and better signal quality. The behavior has to be controlled by the sound card driver, because some sample frequency share the same setting. e.g. 192kHz and 96kHz use 24.576MHz master clock. The only difference is the MCLK divider.
This also added support for 32bit data.

Signed-off-by: Daniel Matuschek <daniel@matuschek.net>
2015-05-01 15:16:34 +01:00
Florian Meier
5ec50b24ac ASoC: BCM2708: Add support for RPi-DAC
This adds a machine driver for the RPi-DAC.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>
2015-05-01 15:16:33 +01:00
Florian Meier
1685814fc1 BCM2708: Add HifiBerry DAC to board file
This adds the initalization of the HifiBerry DAC
to the mach-bcm2708 board file.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>
2015-05-01 15:16:32 +01:00
Florian Meier
1054e906f3 ASoC: Add support for HifiBerry DAC
This adds a machine driver for the HifiBerry DAC.
It is a sound card that can
be stacked onto the Raspberry Pi.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>
2015-05-01 15:16:31 +01:00
Florian Meier
4102a7dbd7 BCM2708: Add I2S support to board file
Adds the required initializations for I2S
to the board file of mach-bcm2708.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>
2015-05-01 15:16:30 +01:00
Florian Meier
c0c4345041 ASoC: Add support for PCM5102A codec
Some definitions to support the PCM5102A codec
by Texas Instruments.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>
2015-05-01 15:16:29 +01:00
Florian Meier
dbb28fde0c ASoC: Add support for BCM2708
This driver adds support for digital audio (I2S)
for the BCM2708 SoC that is used by the
Raspberry Pi. External audio codecs can be
connected to the Raspberry Pi via P5 header.

It relies on cyclic DMA engine support for BCM2708.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>

ASoC: BCM2708: Add 24 bit support

This adds 24 bit support to the I2S driver of the BCM2708.
Besides enabling the 24 bit flags, it includes two bug fixes:

MMAP is not supported. Claiming this leads to strange issues
when the format of driver and file do not match.

The datasheet states that the width extension bit should be set
for widths greater than 24, but greater or equal would be correct.
This follows from the definition of the width field.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>

bcm2708-i2s: Update bclk_ratio to more correct values

Move GPIO setup to hw_params.

This is used to stop the I2S driver from breaking
the GPIO setup for other uses of the PCM interface

Configure GPIOs for I2S based on revision/card settings

With RPi model B+, assignment of the I2S GPIO pins has changed.
This patch uses the board revision to auto-detect the GPIOs used
for I2S. It also allows sound card drivers to set the GPIOs that
should be used. This is especially important with the Compute
Module.

bcm2708-i2s: Avoid leak from iomap when accessing gpio

bcm2708: Eliminate i2s debugfs directory error

Qualify the two regmap ranges uses by bcm2708-i2s ('-i2s' and '-clk')
to avoid the name clash when registering debugfs entries.
2015-05-01 15:16:28 +01:00
popcornmix
511d5ff03d config: Enable CONFIG_MEMCG, but leave it disabled (due to memory cost). Enable with cgroup_enable=memory. 2015-05-01 15:16:27 +01:00
popcornmix
e6178196f0 Added Device IDs for August DVB-T 205 2015-05-01 15:16:26 +01:00
popcornmix
b74131aa0a enabling the realtime clock 1-wire chip DS1307 and 1-wire on GPIO4 (as a module)
1-wire: Add support for configuring pin for w1-gpio kernel module
See: https://github.com/raspberrypi/linux/pull/457

Add bitbanging pullups, use them for w1-gpio

Allows parasite power to work, uses module option pullup=1

bcm2708: Ensure 1-wire pullup is disabled by default, and expose as module parameter

Signed-off-by: Alex J Lennon <ajlennon@dynamicdevices.co.uk>

w1-gpio: Add gpiopin module parameter and correctly free up gpio pull-up pin, if set

Signed-off-by: Alex J Lennon <ajlennon@dynamicdevices.co.uk>
2015-05-01 15:16:25 +01:00
popcornmix
3fc0414796 Allow mac address to be set in smsc95xx
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>
2015-05-01 15:16:24 +01:00
Harm Hanemaaijer
a064f31e6b Speed up console framebuffer imageblit function
Especially on platforms with a slower CPU but a relatively high
framebuffer fill bandwidth, like current ARM devices, the existing
console monochrome imageblit function used to draw console text is
suboptimal for common pixel depths such as 16bpp and 32bpp. The existing
code is quite general and can deal with several pixel depths. By creating
special case functions for 16bpp and 32bpp, by far the most common pixel
formats used on modern systems, a significant speed-up is attained
which can be readily felt on ARM-based devices like the Raspberry Pi
and the Allwinner platform, but should help any platform using the
fb layer.

The special case functions allow constant folding, eliminating a number
of instructions including divide operations, and allow the use of an
unrolled loop, eliminating instructions with a variable shift size,
reducing source memory access instructions, and eliminating excessive
branching. These unrolled loops also allow much better code optimization
by the C compiler. The code that selects which optimized variant is used
is also simplified, eliminating integer divide instructions.

The speed-up, measured by timing 'cat file.txt' in the console, varies
between 40% and 70%, when testing on the Raspberry Pi and Allwinner
ARM-based platforms, depending on font size and the pixel depth, with
the greater benefit for 32bpp.

Signed-off-by: Harm Hanemaaijer <fgenfb@yahoo.com>
2015-05-01 15:16:23 +01:00
popcornmix
2dae2fddbc rtl8192cu: Add PID for D-Link DWA 131 2015-05-01 15:16:22 +01:00
popcornmix
0cd405afec Add non-mainline source for rtl8192cu wireless driver version v4.0.2_9000 as this is widely used. Disabled older rtlwifi driver 2015-05-01 15:16:21 +01:00
Siarhei Siamashka
dbecd2f191 fbdev: add FBIOCOPYAREA ioctl
Based on the patch authored by Ali Gholami Rudi at
    https://lkml.org/lkml/2009/7/13/153

Provide an ioctl for userspace applications, but only if this operation
is hardware accelerated (otherwide it does not make any sense).

Signed-off-by: Siarhei Siamashka <siarhei.siamashka@gmail.com>
2015-05-01 15:16:20 +01:00
notro
671554aed0 BCM2708: Add core Device Tree support
Add the bare minimum needed to boot BCM2708 from a Device Tree.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>

BCM2708: DT: change 'axi' nodename to 'soc'

Change DT node named 'axi' to 'soc' so it matches ARCH_BCM2835.
The VC4 bootloader fills in certain properties in the 'axi' subtree,
but since this is part of an upstreaming effort, the name is changed.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes notro@tronnes.org

BCM2708_DT: Correct length of the peripheral space
2015-05-01 15:16:19 +01:00
notro
191bc5b30c BCM2708: Migrate to the Common Clock Framework
As part of moving towards using Device Tree, the Common Clock Framework
has to be used instead of the BCM2708 clock implementation.

Selecting COMMON_CLK removes the need to set CLKDEV_LOOKUP and HAVE_CLK explicitly.

CONFIG_ARCH_BCM2708_CHIPIT #ifdef's are removed. They are no longer in use.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:16:18 +01:00
notro
c0d39b50f5 spi-bcm2708: Prepare for Common Clock Framework migration
As part of migrating to use the Common Clock Framework, replace clk_enable()
with clk_prepare_enable() and clk_disable() with clk_disable_unprepare().
This does not affect behaviour under the current clock implementation.

Also add a missing clk_disable_unprepare() in the probe error path.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Tronnes <notro@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:16:17 +01:00
Vincent Sanders
b04b9accf5 bcm2835: add v4l2 camera device
- Supports raw YUV capture, preview, JPEG and H264.
- Uses videobuf2 for data transfer, using dma_buf.
- Uses 3.6.10 timestamping
- Camera power based on use
- Uses immutable input mode on video encoder

Signed-off-by: Daniel Stone <daniels@collabora.com>
Signed-off-by: Luke Diamand <luked@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fixes from 6by9

V4L2: Fix EV values. Add manual shutter speed control

V4L2 EV values should be in units of 1/1000. Corrected.
Add support for V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_ABSOLUTE which should
give manual shutter control. Requires manual exposure mode
to be selected first.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Correct JPEG Q-factor range

Should be 1-100, not 0-100

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix issue of driver jamming if STREAMON failed.

Fix issue where the driver was left in a partially enabled
state if STREAMON failed, and would then reject many IOCTLs
as it thought it was streaming.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix ISO controls.

Driver was passing the index to the GPU, and not the desired
ISO value.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add flicker avoidance controls

Add support for V4L2_CID_POWER_LINE_FREQUENCY to set flicker
avoidance frequencies.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add support for frame rate control.

Add support for frame rate (or time per frame as V4L2
inverts it) control via s_parm.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Improve G_FBUF handling so we pass conformance

Return some sane numbers for get framebuffer so that
we pass conformance.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix information advertised through g_vidfmt

Width and height were being stored based on incorrect
values.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add support for inline H264 headers

Add support for V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_REPEAT_SEQ_HEADER
to control H264 inline headers.
Requires firmware fix to work correctly, otherwise format
has to be set to H264 before this parameter is set.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix JPEG timestamp issue

JPEG images were coming through from the GPU with timestamp
of 0. Detect this and give current system time instead
of some invalid value.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix issue when switching down JPEG resolution.

JPEG buffer size calculation is based on input resolution.
Input resolution was being configured after output port
format. Caused failures if switching from one JPEG resolution
to a smaller one.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Enable MJPEG encoding

Requires GPU firmware update to support MJPEG encoder.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Correct flag settings for compressed formats

Set flags field correctly on enum_fmt_vid_cap for compressed
image formats.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: H264 profile & level ctrls, FPS control and auto exp pri

Several control handling updates.
H264 profile and level controls.
Timeperframe/FPS reworked to add V4L2_CID_EXPOSURE_AUTO_PRIORITY to
select whether AE is allowed to override the framerate specified.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Correct BGR24 to RGB24 in format table

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add additional pixel formats. Correct colourspace

Adds the other flavours of YUYV, and NV12.
Corrects the overlay advertised colourspace.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Drop logging msg from info to debug

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Initial pass at scene modes.

Only supports exposure mode and metering modes.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add manual white balance control.

Adds support for V4L2_CID_RED_BALANCE and
V4L2_CID_BLUE_BALANCE. Only has an effect if
V4L2_CID_AUTO_N_PRESET_WHITE_BALANCE has
V4L2_WHITE_BALANCE_MANUAL selected.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

config: Enable V4L / MMAL driver

V4L2: Increase the MMAL timeout to 3sec

MJPEG codec flush is now taking longer and results
in a kernel panic if the driver has stopped waiting for
the result when it finally completes.
Increase the timeout value from 1 to 3secs.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add support for setting H264_I_PERIOD

Adds support for the parameter V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_PERIOD
to set the frequency with which I frames are produced.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Enable GPU function for removing padding from images.

GPU can now support arbitrary strides, although may require
additional processing to achieve it. Enable this feature
so that the images delivered are the size requested.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add support for V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR32

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Set the colourspace to avoid odd YUV-RGB conversions

Removes the amiguity from the conversion routines and stops
them dropping back to the SD vs HD choice of coeffs.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Make video/still threshold a run-time param

Move the define for at what resolution the driver
switches from a video mode capture to a stills mode
capture to module parameters.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Fix incorrect pool sizing

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add option to disable enum_framesizes.

Gstreamer's handling of a driver that advertises
V4L2_FRMSIZE_TYPE_STEPWISE to define the supported
resolutions is broken. See bug
https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=726521

Optional parameter of gst_v4l2src_is_broken added.
If non-zero, the driver claims not to support that
ioctl, and gstreamer should be happy again (it
guesses a set of defaults for itself).

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Add support for more image formats

Adds YVU420 (YV12), YVU420SP (NV21), and BGR888.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

V4L2: Extend range for V4L2_CID_MPEG_VIDEO_H264_I_PERIOD

Request to extend the range from the fairly arbitrary
1000 frames (33 seconds at 30fps). Extend out to the
max range supported (int32 value).
Also allow 0, which is handled by the codec as only
send an I-frame on the first frame and never again.
There may be an exception if it detects a significant
scene change, but there's no easy way around that.

Signed-off-by: Dave Stevenson <dsteve@broadcom.com>

bcm2835-camera: stop_streaming now has a void return

BCM2835-V4L2: Fix compliance test failures

VIDIOC_TRY_FMT and VIDIOC_S_FMT tests were faling due
to reporting V4L2_COLORSPACE_JPEG when the colour
format wasn't V4L2_PIX_FMT_JPEG.
Now reports V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE170M for YUV formats.
2015-05-01 15:16:16 +01:00
popcornmix
0d075f7303 Add Chris Boot's i2c and spi drivers.
i2c-bcm2708: fixed baudrate

Fixed issue where the wrong CDIV value was set for baudrates below 3815 Hz (for 250MHz bus clock).
In that case the computed CDIV value was more than 0xffff. However the CDIV register width is only 16 bits.
This resulted in incorrect setting of CDIV and higher baudrate than intended.
Example: 3500Hz -> CDIV=0x11704 -> CDIV(16bit)=0x1704 -> 42430Hz
After correction: 3500Hz -> CDIV=0x11704 -> CDIV(16bit)=0xffff -> 3815Hz
The correct baudrate is shown in the log after the cdiv > 0xffff correction.

Perform I2C combined transactions when possible

Perform I2C combined transactions whenever possible, within the
restrictions of the Broadcomm Serial Controller.

Disable DONE interrupt during TA poll

Prevent interrupt from being triggered if poll is missed and transfer
starts and finishes.

i2c: Make combined transactions optional and disabled by default
2015-05-01 15:16:15 +01:00
popcornmix
d926a40edc Added hwmon/thermal driver for reporting core temperature. Thanks Dorian 2015-05-01 15:16:14 +01:00
popcornmix
32d6e3231f Add cpufreq driver 2015-05-01 15:16:13 +01:00
Aron Szabo
904a182ff0 lirc: added support for RaspberryPi GPIO
lirc_rpi: Use read_current_timer to determine transmitter delay. Thanks to jjmz and others
See: https://github.com/raspberrypi/linux/issues/525

lirc: Remove restriction on gpio pins that can be used with lirc

Compute Module, for example could use different pins

lirc_rpi: Add parameter to specify input pin pull

Depending on the connected IR circuitry it might be desirable to change the
gpios internal pull from it pull-down default behaviour. Add a module
parameter to allow the user to set it explicitly.

Signed-off-by: Julian Scheel <julian@jusst.de>

lirc-rpi: Use the higher-level irq control functions

This module used to access the irq_chip methods of the
gpio controller directly, rather than going through the
standard enable_irq/irq_set_irq_type functions. This
caused problems on pinctrl-bcm2835 which only implements
the irq_enable/disable methods and not irq_unmask/mask.

lirc-rpi: Correct the interrupt usage

1) Correct the use of enable_irq (i.e. don't call it so often)
2) Correct the shutdown sequence.
3) Avoid a bcm2708_gpio driver quirk by setting the irq flags earlier

lirc-rpi: use getnstimeofday instead of read_current_timer

read_current_timer isn't guaranteed to return values in
microseconds, and indeed it doesn't on a Pi2.

Issue: linux#827
2015-05-01 15:16:12 +01:00
popcornmix
773c64424d Add hwrng (hardware random number generator) driver 2015-05-01 15:16:11 +01:00
Tim Gover
f4a8d547b2 vcsm: VideoCore shared memory service for BCM2835
Add experimental support for the VideoCore shared memory service.
This allows user processes to allocate memory from VideoCore's
GPU relocatable heap and mmap the buffers. Additionally, the memory
handles can passed to other VideoCore services such as MMAL, OpenMax
and DispmanX

TODO
* This driver was originally released for BCM28155 which has a different
  cache architecture to BCM2835. Consequently, in this release only
  uncached mappings are supported. However, there's no fundamental
  reason which cached mappings cannot be support or BCM2835
* More refactoring is required to remove the typedefs.
* Re-enable the some of the commented out debug-fs statistics which were
  disabled when migrating code from proc-fs.
* There's a lot of code to support sharing of VCSM in order to support
  Android. This could probably done more cleanly or perhaps just
  removed.

Signed-off-by: Tim Gover <timgover@gmail.com>

config: Disable VC_SM for now to fix hang with cutdown kernel

vcsm: Use boolean as it cannot be built as module

On building the bcm_vc_sm as a module we get the following error:

v7_dma_flush_range and do_munmap are undefined in vc-sm.ko.

Fix by making it not an option to build as module
2015-05-01 15:15:41 +01:00
popcornmix
97dda9a97d bcm2708 vchiq driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

vchiq: create_pagelist copes with vmalloc memory

Signed-off-by: Daniel Stone <daniels@collabora.com>

vchiq: fix the shim message release

Signed-off-by: Daniel Stone <daniels@collabora.com>

vchiq: export additional symbols

Signed-off-by: Daniel Stone <daniels@collabora.com>

VCHIQ: Make service closure fully synchronous (drv)

This is one half of a two-part patch, the other half of which is to
the vchiq_lib user library. With these patches, calls to
vchiq_close_service and vchiq_remove_service won't return until any
associated callbacks have been delivered to the callback thread.

VCHIQ: Add per-service tracing

The new service option VCHIQ_SERVICE_OPTION_TRACE is a boolean that
toggles tracing for the specified service.

This commit also introduces vchi_service_set_option and the associated
option VCHI_SERVICE_OPTION_TRACE.

vchiq: Make the synchronous-CLOSE logic more tolerant

vchiq: Move logging control into debugfs

vchiq: Take care of a corner case tickled by VCSM

Closing a connection that isn't fully open requires care, since one
side does not know the other side's port number. Code was present to
handle the case where a CLOSE is sent immediately after an OPEN, i.e.
before the OPENACK has been received, but this was incorrectly being
used when an OPEN from a client using port 0 was rejected.

(In the observed failure, the host was attempting to use the VCSM
service, which isn't present in the 'cutdown' firmware. The failure
was intermittent because sometimes the keepalive service would
grab port 0.)

This case can be distinguished because the client's remoteport will
still be VCHIQ_PORT_FREE, and the srvstate will be OPENING. Either
condition is sufficient to differentiate it from the special case
described above.

vchiq: Avoid high load when blocked and unkillable

vchiq: Include SIGSTOP and SIGCONT in list of signals not-masked by vchiq to allow gdb to work

vchiq_arm: Complete support for SYNCHRONOUS mode

vchiq: Remove inline from suspend/resume
2015-05-01 15:15:39 +01:00
popcornmix
fccbda977c bcm2708: alsa sound driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

alsa: add mmap support and some cleanups to bcm2835 ALSA driver

snd-bcm2835: Add support for spdif/hdmi passthrough

This adds a dedicated subdevice which can be used for passthrough of non-audio
formats (ie encoded a52) through the hdmi audio link. In addition to this
driver extension an appropriate card config is required to make alsa-lib
support the AES parameters for this device.

snd-bcm2708: Add mutex, improve logging

Fix for ALSA driver crash

Avoids an issue when closing and opening vchiq where a message can arrive before service handle has been written

alsa: reduce severity of expected warning message

snd-bcm2708: Fix dmesg spam for non-error case

alsa: Ensure mutexes are released through error paths

alsa: Make interrupted close paths quieter
2015-05-01 15:15:25 +01:00
popcornmix
594665ed12 cma: Add vc_cma driver to enable use of CMA
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

vc_cma: Make the vc_cma area the default contiguous DMA area
2015-05-01 15:10:35 +01:00
gellert
086397f74b MMC: added alternative MMC driver
mmc: Disable CMD23 transfers on all cards

Pending wire-level investigation of these types of transfers
and associated errors on bcm2835-mmc, disable for now. Fallback of
CMD18/CMD25 transfers will be used automatically by the MMC layer.

Reported/Tested-by: Gellert Weisz <gellert@raspberrypi.org>

mmc: bcm2835-mmc: enable DT support for all architectures

Both ARCH_BCM2835 and ARCH_BCM270x are built with OF now.
Enable Device Tree support for all architectures.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>

mmc: bcm2835-mmc: fix probe error handling

Probe error handling is broken in several places.
Simplify error handling by using device managed functions.
Replace pr_{err,info} with dev_{err,info}.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:10:34 +01:00
Florian Meier
040ebd148d dmaengine: Add support for BCM2708
Add support for DMA controller of BCM2708 as used in the Raspberry Pi.
Currently it only supports cyclic DMA.

Signed-off-by: Florian Meier <florian.meier@koalo.de>

dmaengine: expand functionality by supporting scatter/gather transfers sdhci-bcm2708 and dma.c: fix for LITE channels

DMA: fix cyclic LITE length overflow bug

dmaengine: bcm2708: Remove chancnt affectations

Mirror bcm2835-dma.c commit 9eba5536a7:
chancnt is already filled by dma_async_device_register, which uses the channel
list to know how much channels there is.

Since it's already filled, we can safely remove it from the drivers' probe
function.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>

dmaengine: bcm2708: overwrite dreq only if it is not set

dreq is set when the DMA channel is fetched from Device Tree.
slave_id is set using dmaengine_slave_config().
Only overwrite dreq with slave_id if it is not set.

dreq/slave_id in the cyclic DMA case is not touched, because I don't
have hardware to test with.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>

dmaengine: bcm2708: do device registration in the board file

Don't register the device in the driver. Do it in the board file.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>

dmaengine: bcm2708: don't restrict DT support to ARCH_BCM2835

Both ARCH_BCM2835 and ARCH_BCM270x are built with OF now.
Add Device Tree support to the non ARCH_BCM2835 case.
Use the same driver name regardless of architecture.

Signed-off-by: Noralf Trønnes <noralf@tronnes.org>
2015-05-01 15:10:31 +01:00
popcornmix
0f320c21ab bcm2708 framebuffer driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

bcm2708_fb : Implement blanking support using the mailbox property interface

bcm2708_fb: Add pan and vsync controls

bcm2708_fb: DMA acceleration for fb_copyarea

Based on http://www.raspberrypi.org/phpBB3/viewtopic.php?p=62425#p62425
Also used Simon's dmaer_master module as a reference for tweaking DMA
settings for better performance.

For now busylooping only. IRQ support might be added later.
With non-overclocked Raspberry Pi, the performance is ~360 MB/s
for simple copy or ~260 MB/s for two-pass copy (used when dragging
windows to the right).

In the case of using DMA channel 0, the performance improves
to ~440 MB/s.

For comparison, VFP optimized CPU copy can only do ~114 MB/s in
the same conditions (hindered by reading uncached source buffer).

Signed-off-by: Siarhei Siamashka <siarhei.siamashka@gmail.com>

bcm2708_fb: report number of dma copies

Add a counter (exported via debugfs) reporting the
number of dma copies that the framebuffer driver
has done, in order to help evaluate different
optimization strategies.

Signed-off-by: Luke Diamand <luked@broadcom.com>

bcm2708_fb: use IRQ for DMA copies

The copyarea ioctl() uses DMA to speed things along. This
was busy-waiting for completion. This change supports using
an interrupt instead for larger transfers. For small
transfers, busy-waiting is still likely to be faster.

Signed-off-by: Luke Diamand <luke@diamand.org>

bcm2708: Make ioctl logging quieter
2015-05-01 15:10:30 +01:00
popcornmix
c3a4819b87 bcm2708 watchdog driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>
2015-05-01 15:10:28 +01:00
popcornmix
775b3e09b7 Add dwc_otg driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

usb: dwc: fix lockdep false positive

Signed-off-by: Kari Suvanto <karis79@gmail.com>

usb: dwc: fix inconsistent lock state

Signed-off-by: Kari Suvanto <karis79@gmail.com>

Add FIQ patch to dwc_otg driver. Enable with dwc_otg.fiq_fix_enable=1. Should give about 10% more ARM performance.
Thanks to Gordon and Costas

Avoid dynamic memory allocation for channel lock in USB driver. Thanks ddv2005.

Add NAK holdoff scheme. Enabled by default, disable with dwc_otg.nak_holdoff_enable=0. Thanks gsh

Make sure we wait for the reset to finish

dwc_otg: fix bug in dwc_otg_hcd.c resulting in silent kernel
	 memory corruption, escalating to OOPS under high USB load.

dwc_otg: Fix unsafe access of QTD during URB enqueue

In dwc_otg_hcd_urb_enqueue during qtd creation, it was possible that the
transaction could complete almost immediately after the qtd was assigned
to a host channel during URB enqueue, which meant the qtd pointer was no
longer valid having been completed and removed. Usually, this resulted in
an OOPS during URB submission. By predetermining whether transactions
need to be queued or not, this unsafe pointer access is avoided.

This bug was only evident on the Pi model A where a device was attached
that had no periodic endpoints (e.g. USB pendrive or some wlan devices).

dwc_otg: Fix incorrect URB allocation error handling

If the memory allocation for a dwc_otg_urb failed, the kernel would OOPS
because for some reason a member of the *unallocated* struct was set to
zero. Error handling changed to fail correctly.

dwc_otg: fix potential use-after-free case in interrupt handler

If a transaction had previously aborted, certain interrupts are
enabled to track error counts and reset where necessary. On IN
endpoints the host generates an ACK interrupt near-simultaneously
with completion of transfer. In the case where this transfer had
previously had an error, this results in a use-after-free on
the QTD memory space with a 1-byte length being overwritten to
0x00.

dwc_otg: add handling of SPLIT transaction data toggle errors

Previously a data toggle error on packets from a USB1.1 device behind
a TT would result in the Pi locking up as the driver never handled
the associated interrupt. Patch adds basic retry mechanism and
interrupt acknowledgement to cater for either a chance toggle error or
for devices that have a broken initial toggle state (FT8U232/FT232BM).

dwc_otg: implement tasklet for returning URBs to usbcore hcd layer

The dwc_otg driver interrupt handler for transfer completion will spend
a very long time with interrupts disabled when a URB is completed -
this is because usb_hcd_giveback_urb is called from within the handler
which for a USB device driver with complicated processing (e.g. webcam)
will take an exorbitant amount of time to complete. This results in
missed completion interrupts for other USB packets which lead to them
being dropped due to microframe overruns.

This patch splits returning the URB to the usb hcd layer into a
high-priority tasklet. This will have most benefit for isochronous IN
transfers but will also have incidental benefit where multiple periodic
devices are active at once.

dwc_otg: fix NAK holdoff and allow on split transactions only

This corrects a bug where if a single active non-periodic endpoint
had at least one transaction in its qh, on frnum == MAX_FRNUM the qh
would get skipped and never get queued again. This would result in
a silent device until error detection (automatic or otherwise) would
either reset the device or flush and requeue the URBs.

Additionally the NAK holdoff was enabled for all transactions - this
would potentially stall a HS endpoint for 1ms if a previous error state
enabled this interrupt and the next response was a NAK. Fix so that
only split transactions get held off.

dwc_otg: Call usb_hcd_unlink_urb_from_ep with lock held in completion handler

usb_hcd_unlink_urb_from_ep must be called with the HCD lock held.  Calling it
asynchronously in the tasklet was not safe (regression in
c4564d4a1a).

This change unlinks it from the endpoint prior to queueing it for handling in
the tasklet, and also adds a check to ensure the urb is OK to be unlinked
before doing so.

NULL pointer dereference kernel oopses had been observed in usb_hcd_giveback_urb
when a USB device was unplugged/replugged during data transfer.  This effect
was reproduced using automated USB port power control, hundreds of replug
events were performed during active transfers to confirm that the problem was
eliminated.

USB fix using a FIQ to implement split transactions

This commit adds a FIQ implementaion that schedules
the split transactions using a FIQ so we don't get
held off by the interrupt latency of Linux

dwc_otg: fix device attributes and avoid kernel warnings on boot

dcw_otg: avoid logging function that can cause panics

See: https://github.com/raspberrypi/firmware/issues/21
Thanks to cleverca22 for fix

dwc_otg: mask correct interrupts after transaction error recovery

The dwc_otg driver will unmask certain interrupts on a transaction
that previously halted in the error state in order to reset the
QTD error count. The various fine-grained interrupt handlers do not
consider that other interrupts besides themselves were unmasked.

By disabling the two other interrupts only ever enabled in DMA mode
for this purpose, we can avoid unnecessary function calls in the
IRQ handler. This will also prevent an unneccesary FIQ interrupt
from being generated if the FIQ is enabled.

dwc_otg: fiq: prevent FIQ thrash and incorrect state passing to IRQ

In the case of a transaction to a device that had previously aborted
due to an error, several interrupts are enabled to reset the error
count when a device responds. This has the side-effect of making the
FIQ thrash because the hardware will generate multiple instances of
a NAK on an IN bulk/interrupt endpoint and multiple instances of ACK
on an OUT bulk/interrupt endpoint. Make the FIQ mask and clear the
associated interrupts.

Additionally, on non-split transactions make sure that only unmasked
interrupts are cleared. This caused a hard-to-trigger but serious
race condition when you had the combination of an endpoint awaiting
error recovery and a transaction completed on an endpoint - due to
the sequencing and timing of interrupts generated by the dwc_otg core,
it was possible to confuse the IRQ handler.

Fix function tracing

dwc_otg: whitespace cleanup in dwc_otg_urb_enqueue

dwc_otg: prevent OOPSes during device disconnects

The dwc_otg_urb_enqueue function is thread-unsafe. In particular the
access of urb->hcpriv, usb_hcd_link_urb_to_ep, dwc_otg_urb->qtd and
friends does not occur within a critical section and so if a device
was unplugged during activity there was a high chance that the
usbcore hub_thread would try to disable the endpoint with partially-
formed entries in the URB queue. This would result in BUG() or null
pointer dereferences.

Fix so that access of urb->hcpriv, enqueuing to the hardware and
adding to usbcore endpoint URB lists is contained within a single
critical section.

dwc_otg: prevent BUG() in TT allocation if hub address is > 16

A fixed-size array is used to track TT allocation. This was
previously set to 16 which caused a crash because
dwc_otg_hcd_allocate_port would read past the end of the array.

This was hit if a hub was plugged in which enumerated as addr > 16,
due to previous device resets or unplugs.

Also add #ifdef FIQ_DEBUG around hcd->hub_port_alloc[], which grows
to a large size if 128 hub addresses are supported. This field is
for debug only for tracking which frame an allocate happened in.

dwc_otg: make channel halts with unknown state less damaging

If the IRQ received a channel halt interrupt through the FIQ
with no other bits set, the IRQ would not release the host
channel and never complete the URB.

Add catchall handling to treat as a transaction error and retry.

dwc_otg: fiq_split: use TTs with more granularity

This fixes certain issues with split transaction scheduling.

- Isochronous multi-packet OUT transactions now hog the TT until
  they are completed - this prevents hubs aborting transactions
  if they get a periodic start-split out-of-order
- Don't perform TT allocation on non-periodic endpoints - this
  allows simultaneous use of the TT's bulk/control and periodic
  transaction buffers

This commit will mainly affect USB audio playback.

dwc_otg: fix potential sleep while atomic during urb enqueue

Fixes a regression introduced with eb1b482a. Kmalloc called from
dwc_otg_hcd_qtd_add / dwc_otg_hcd_qtd_create did not always have
the GPF_ATOMIC flag set. Force this flag when inside the larger
critical section.

dwc_otg: make fiq_split_enable imply fiq_fix_enable

Failing to set up the FIQ correctly would result in
"IRQ 32: nobody cared" errors in dmesg.

dwc_otg: prevent crashes on host port disconnects

Fix several issues resulting in crashes or inconsistent state
if a Model A root port was disconnected.

- Clean up queue heads properly in kill_urbs_in_qh_list by
  removing the empty QHs from the schedule lists
- Set the halt status properly to prevent IRQ handlers from
  using freed memory
- Add fiq_split related cleanup for saved registers
- Make microframe scheduling reclaim host channels if
  active during a disconnect
- Abort URBs with -ESHUTDOWN status response, informing
  device drivers so they respond in a more correct fashion
  and don't try to resubmit URBs
- Prevent IRQ handlers from attempting to handle channel
  interrupts if the associated URB was dequeued (and the
  driver state was cleared)

dwc_otg: prevent leaking URBs during enqueue

A dwc_otg_urb would get leaked if the HCD enqueue function
failed for any reason. Free the URB at the appropriate points.

dwc_otg: Enable NAK holdoff for control split transactions

Certain low-speed devices take a very long time to complete a
data or status stage of a control transaction, producing NAK
responses until they complete internal processing - the USB2.0
spec limit is up to 500mS. This causes the same type of interrupt
storm as seen with USB-serial dongles prior to c8edb238.

In certain circumstances, usually while booting, this interrupt
storm could cause SD card timeouts.

dwc_otg: Fix for occasional lockup on boot when doing a USB reset

dwc_otg: Don't issue traffic to LS devices in FS mode

Issuing low-speed packets when the root port is in full-speed mode
causes the root port to stop responding. Explicitly fail when
enqueuing URBs to a LS endpoint on a FS bus.

Fix ARM architecture issue with local_irq_restore()

If local_fiq_enable() is called before a local_irq_restore(flags) where
the flags variable has the F bit set, the FIQ will be erroneously disabled.

Fixup arch_local_irq_restore to avoid trampling the F bit in CPSR.

Also fix some of the hacks previously implemented for previous dwc_otg
incarnations.

dwc_otg: fiq_fsm: Base commit for driver rewrite

This commit removes the previous FIQ fixes entirely and adds fiq_fsm.

This rewrite features much more complete support for split transactions
and takes into account several OTG hardware bugs. High-speed
isochronous transactions are also capable of being performed by fiq_fsm.

All driver options have been removed and replaced with:
  - dwc_otg.fiq_enable (bool)
  - dwc_otg.fiq_fsm_enable (bool)
  - dwc_otg.fiq_fsm_mask (bitmask)
  - dwc_otg.nak_holdoff (unsigned int)

Defaults are specified such that fiq_fsm behaves similarly to the
previously implemented FIQ fixes.

fiq_fsm: Push error recovery into the FIQ when fiq_fsm is used

If the transfer associated with a QTD failed due to a bus error, the HCD
would retry the transfer up to 3 times (implementing the USB2.0
three-strikes retry in software).

Due to the masking mechanism used by fiq_fsm, it is only possible to pass
a single interrupt through to the HCD per-transfer.

In this instance host channels would fall off the radar because the error
reset would function, but the subsequent channel halt would be lost.

Push the error count reset into the FIQ handler.

fiq_fsm: Implement timeout mechanism

For full-speed endpoints with a large packet size, interrupt latency
runs the risk of the FIQ starting a transaction too late in a full-speed
frame. If the device is still transmitting data when EOF2 for the
downstream frame occurs, the hub will disable the port. This change is
not reflected in the hub status endpoint and the device becomes
unresponsive.

Prevent high-bandwidth transactions from being started too late in a
frame. The mechanism is not guaranteed: a combination of bit stuffing
and hub latency may still result in a device overrunning.

fiq_fsm: fix bounce buffer utilisation for Isochronous OUT

Multi-packet isochronous OUT transactions were subject to a few bounday
bugs. Fix them.

Audio playback is now much more robust: however, an issue stands with
devices that have adaptive sinks - ALSA plays samples too fast.

dwc_otg: Return full-speed frame numbers in HS mode

The frame counter increments on every *microframe* in high-speed mode.
Most device drivers expect this number to be in full-speed frames - this
caused considerable confusion to e.g. snd_usb_audio which uses the
frame counter to estimate the number of samples played.

fiq_fsm: save PID on completion of interrupt OUT transfers

Also add edge case handling for interrupt transports.

Note that for periodic split IN, data toggles are unimplemented in the
OTG host hardware - it unconditionally accepts any PID.

fiq_fsm: add missing case for fiq_fsm_tt_in_use()

Certain combinations of bitrate and endpoint activity could
result in a periodic transaction erroneously getting started
while the previous Isochronous OUT was still active.

fiq_fsm: clear hcintmsk for aborted transactions

Prevents the FIQ from erroneously handling interrupts
on a timed out channel.

fiq_fsm: enable by default

fiq_fsm: fix dequeues for non-periodic split transactions

If a dequeue happened between the SSPLIT and CSPLIT phases of the
transaction, the HCD would never receive an interrupt.

fiq_fsm: Disable by default

fiq_fsm: Handle HC babble errors

The HCTSIZ transfer size field raises a babble interrupt if
the counter wraps. Handle the resulting interrupt in this case.

dwc_otg: fix interrupt registration for fiq_enable=0

Additionally make the module parameter conditional for wherever
hcd->fiq_state is touched.

fiq_fsm: Enable by default

dwc_otg: Fix various issues with root port and transaction errors

Process the host port interrupts correctly (and don't trample them).
Root port hotplug now functional again.

Fix a few thinkos with the transaction error passthrough for fiq_fsm.

fiq_fsm: Implement hack for Split Interrupt transactions

Hubs aren't too picky about which endpoint we send Control type split
transactions to. By treating Interrupt transfers as Control, it is
possible to use the non-periodic queue in the OTG core as well as the
non-periodic FIFOs in the hub itself. This massively reduces the
microframe exclusivity/contention that periodic split transactions
otherwise have to enforce.

It goes without saying that this is a fairly egregious USB specification
violation, but it works.

Original idea by Hans Petter Selasky @ FreeBSD.org.

dwc_otg: FIQ support on SMP. Set up FIQ stack and handler on Core 0 only.

dwc_otg: introduce fiq_fsm_spin(un|)lock()

SMP safety for the FIQ relies on register read-modify write cycles being
completed in the correct order. Several places in the DWC code modify
registers also touched by the FIQ. Protect these by a bare-bones lock
mechanism.

This also makes it possible to run the FIQ and IRQ handlers on different
cores.

fiq_fsm: fix build on bcm2708 and bcm2709 platforms

dwc_otg: put some barriers back where they should be for UP

bcm2709/dwc_otg: Setup FIQ on core 1 if >1 core active

dwc_otg: fixup read-modify-write in critical paths

Be more careful about read-modify-write on registers that the FIQ
also touches.

Guard fiq_fsm_spin_lock with fiq_enable check

fiq_fsm: Falling out of the state machine isn't fatal

This edge case can be hit if the port is disabled while the FIQ is
in the middle of a transaction. Make the effects less severe.

Also get rid of the useless return value.
2015-05-01 15:10:27 +01:00
popcornmix
0c400d1938 Add bcm2708_gpio driver
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>

bcm2708: Add extension to configure internal pulls

The bcm2708 gpio controller supports internal pulls to be used as pull-up,
pull-down or being entirely disabled. As it can be useful for a driver to
change the pull configuration from it's default pull-down state, add an
extension which allows configuring the pull per gpio.

Signed-off-by: Julian Scheel <julian@jusst.de>

bcm2708-gpio: Revert the use of pinctrl_request_gpio

In non-DT systems, pinctrl_request_gpio always fails causing
"requests probe deferral" messages. In DT systems, it isn't useful
because the reference counting is independent of the normal pinctrl
pin reservations.

gpio: Only clear the currently occurring interrupt. Avoids losing interrupts

See: linux #760

bcm2708_gpio: Avoid calling irq_unmask for all interrupts

When setting up the interrupts, specify that the handle_simple_irq
handler should be used. This leaves interrupt acknowledgement to
the caller, and prevents irq_unmask from being called for all
interrupts.

Issue: linux #760
2015-05-01 15:10:26 +01:00
popcornmix
cf0e6b17a6 Add 2709 platform for Raspberry Pi 2 2015-05-01 15:10:25 +01:00
popcornmix
a041b743ae Main bcm2708 linux port
Signed-off-by: popcornmix <popcornmix@gmail.com>
2015-05-01 15:07:14 +01:00
Greg Kroah-Hartman
1b0ebf2964 Linux 4.0.1 2015-04-29 10:22:30 +02:00
Jann Horn
bdb29adaff fs: take i_mutex during prepare_binprm for set[ug]id executables
commit 8b01fc86b9 upstream.

This prevents a race between chown() and execve(), where chowning a
setuid-user binary to root would momentarily make the binary setuid
root.

This patch was mostly written by Linus Torvalds.

Signed-off-by: Jann Horn <jann@thejh.net>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
2015-04-29 10:22:18 +02:00
Herbert Xu
d968c92507 skbuff: Do not scrub skb mark within the same name space
[ Upstream commit 213dd74aee ]

On Wed, Apr 15, 2015 at 05:41:26PM +0200, Nicolas Dichtel wrote:
> Le 15/04/2015 15:57, Herbert Xu a écrit :
> >On Wed, Apr 15, 2015 at 06:22:29PM +0800, Herbert Xu wrote:
> [snip]
> >Subject: skbuff: Do not scrub skb mark within the same name space
> >
> >The commit ea23192e8e ("tunnels:
> Maybe add a Fixes tag?
> Fixes: ea23192e8e ("tunnels: harmonize cleanup done on skb on rx path")
>
> >harmonize cleanup done on skb on rx path") broke anyone trying to
> >use netfilter marking across IPv4 tunnels.  While most of the
> >fields that are cleared by skb_scrub_packet don't matter, the
> >netfilter mark must be preserved.
> >
> >This patch rearranges skb_scurb_packet to preserve the mark field.
> nit: s/scurb/scrub
>
> Else it's fine for me.

Sure.

PS I used the wrong email for James the first time around.  So
let me repeat the question here.  Should secmark be preserved
or cleared across tunnels within the same name space? In fact,
do our security models even support name spaces?

---8<---
The commit ea23192e8e ("tunnels:
harmonize cleanup done on skb on rx path") broke anyone trying to
use netfilter marking across IPv4 tunnels.  While most of the
fields that are cleared by skb_scrub_packet don't matter, the
netfilter mark must be preserved.

This patch rearranges skb_scrub_packet to preserve the mark field.

Fixes: ea23192e8e ("tunnels: harmonize cleanup done on skb on rx path")
Signed-off-by: Herbert Xu <herbert@gondor.apana.org.au>
Acked-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch>
Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
2015-04-29 10:22:18 +02:00
Herbert Xu
d44d126382 Revert "net: Reset secmark when scrubbing packet"
[ Upstream commit 4c0ee414e8 ]

This patch reverts commit b8fb4e0648
because the secmark must be preserved even when a packet crosses
namespace boundaries.  The reason is that security labels apply to
the system as a whole and is not per-namespace.

Signed-off-by: Herbert Xu <herbert@gondor.apana.org.au>
Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
2015-04-29 10:22:18 +02:00
Alexei Starovoitov
32a08be658 bpf: fix verifier memory corruption
[ Upstream commit c3de6317d7 ]

Due to missing bounds check the DAG pass of the BPF verifier can corrupt
the memory which can cause random crashes during program loading:

[8.449451] BUG: unable to handle kernel paging request at ffffffffffffffff
[8.451293] IP: [<ffffffff811de33d>] kmem_cache_alloc_trace+0x8d/0x2f0
[8.452329] Oops: 0000 [#1] SMP
[8.452329] Call Trace:
[8.452329]  [<ffffffff8116cc82>] bpf_check+0x852/0x2000
[8.452329]  [<ffffffff8116b7e4>] bpf_prog_load+0x1e4/0x310
[8.452329]  [<ffffffff811b190f>] ? might_fault+0x5f/0xb0
[8.452329]  [<ffffffff8116c206>] SyS_bpf+0x806/0xa30

Fixes: f1bca824da ("bpf: add search pruning optimization to verifier")
Signed-off-by: Alexei Starovoitov <ast@plumgrid.com>
Acked-by: Hannes Frederic Sowa <hannes@stressinduktion.org>
Acked-by: Daniel Borkmann <daniel@iogearbox.net>
Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
2015-04-29 10:22:18 +02:00
Eric Dumazet
db35b1ca6a bnx2x: Fix busy_poll vs netpoll
[ Upstream commit 074975d037 ]

Commit 9a2620c877 ("bnx2x: prevent WARN during driver unload")
switched the napi/busy_lock locking mechanism from spin_lock() into
spin_lock_bh(), breaking inter-operability with netconsole, as netpoll
disables interrupts prior to calling our napi mechanism.

This switches the driver into using atomic assignments instead of the
spinlock mechanisms previously employed.

Based on initial patch from Yuval Mintz & Ariel Elior

I basically added softirq starvation avoidance, and mixture
of atomic operations, plain writes and barriers.

Note this slightly reduces the overhead for this driver when no
busy_poll sockets are in use.

Fixes: 9a2620c877 ("bnx2x: prevent WARN during driver unload")
Signed-off-by: Eric Dumazet <edumazet@google.com>
Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
2015-04-29 10:22:17 +02:00
Eric Dumazet
8e7e388769 tcp: tcp_make_synack() should clear skb->tstamp
[ Upstream commit b50edd7812 ]

I noticed tcpdump was giving funky timestamps for locally
generated SYNACK messages on loopback interface.

11:42:46.938990 IP 127.0.0.1.48245 > 127.0.0.2.23850: S
945476042:945476042(0) win 43690 <mss 65495,nop,nop,sackOK,nop,wscale 7>

20:28:58.502209 IP 127.0.0.2.23850 > 127.0.0.1.48245: S
3160535375:3160535375(0) ack 945476043 win 43690 <mss
65495,nop,nop,sackOK,nop,wscale 7>

This is because we need to clear skb->tstamp before
entering lower stack, otherwise net_timestamp_check()
does not set skb->tstamp.

Fixes: 7faee5c0d5 ("tcp: remove TCP_SKB_CB(skb)->when")
Signed-off-by: Eric Dumazet <edumazet@google.com>
Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
2015-04-29 10:22:17 +02:00
Jesse Gross
6906cf7373 udptunnels: Call handle_offloads after inserting vlan tag.
[ Upstream commit b736a623bd ]

handle_offloads() calls skb_reset_inner_headers() to store
the layer pointers to the encapsulated packet. However, we
currently push the vlag tag (if there is one) onto the packet
afterwards. This changes the MAC header for the encapsulated
packet but it is not reflected in skb->inner_mac_header, which
breaks GSO and drivers which attempt to use this for encapsulation
offloads.

Fixes: 1eaa8178 ("vxlan: Add tx-vlan offload support.")
Signed-off-by: Jesse Gross <jesse@nicira.com>
Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
2015-04-29 10:22:17 +02:00
10949 changed files with 232187 additions and 474795 deletions

1
.gitignore vendored
View File

@@ -24,7 +24,6 @@
*.order
*.elf
*.bin
*.tar
*.gz
*.bz2
*.lzma

View File

@@ -100,7 +100,6 @@ Rajesh Shah <rajesh.shah@intel.com>
Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
Ralf Wildenhues <Ralf.Wildenhues@gmx.de>
Rémi Denis-Courmont <rdenis@simphalempin.com>
Ricardo Ribalda Delgado <ricardo.ribalda@gmail.com>
Rudolf Marek <R.Marek@sh.cvut.cz>
Rui Saraiva <rmps@joel.ist.utl.pt>
Sachin P Sant <ssant@in.ibm.com>

32
CREDITS
View File

@@ -187,10 +187,6 @@ N: Krishna Balasubramanian
E: balasub@cis.ohio-state.edu
D: Wrote SYS V IPC (part of standard kernel since 0.99.10)
N: Chris Ball
E: chris@printf.net
D: Former maintainer of the MMC/SD/SDIO subsystem.
N: Dario Ballabio
E: ballabio_dario@emc.com
E: dario.ballabio@tiscalinet.it
@@ -508,10 +504,6 @@ E: paul@paulbristow.net
W: http://paulbristow.net/linux/idefloppy.html
D: Maintainer of IDE/ATAPI floppy driver
N: Stefano Brivio
E: stefano.brivio@polimi.it
D: Broadcom B43 driver
N: Dominik Brodowski
E: linux@brodo.de
W: http://www.brodo.de/
@@ -2049,10 +2041,6 @@ D: pirq addr, CS5535 alsa audio driver
S: Gurgaon, India
S: Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
N: Mohit Kumar
D: ST Microelectronics SPEAr13xx PCI host bridge driver
D: Synopsys Designware PCI host bridge driver
N: Gabor Kuti
M: seasons@falcon.sch.bme.hu
M: seasons@makosteszta.sote.hu
@@ -3016,19 +3004,6 @@ W: http://www.qsl.net/dl1bke/
D: Generic Z8530 driver, AX.25 DAMA slave implementation
D: Several AX.25 hacks
N: Ricardo Ribalda Delgado
E: ricardo.ribalda@gmail.com
W: http://ribalda.com
D: PLX USB338x driver
D: PCA9634 driver
D: Option GTM671WFS
D: Fintek F81216A
D: Various kernel hacks
S: Qtechnology A/S
S: Valby Langgade 142
S: 2500 Valby
S: Denmark
N: Francois-Rene Rideau
E: fare@tunes.org
W: http://www.tunes.org/~fare
@@ -3709,13 +3684,6 @@ N: Dirk Verworner
D: Co-author of German book ``Linux-Kernel-Programmierung''
D: Co-founder of Berlin Linux User Group
N: Andrew Victor
E: linux@maxim.org.za
W: http://maxim.org.za/at91_26.html
D: First maintainer of Atmel ARM-based SoC, aka AT91
D: Introduced support for at91rm9200, the first chip of AT91 family
S: South Africa
N: Riku Voipio
E: riku.voipio@iki.fi
D: Author of PCA9532 LED and Fintek f75375s hwmon driver

View File

@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/num_reads
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The num_reads file is read-only and specifies the number of
reads (failed or successful) done on this device.
Now accessible via zram<id>/stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/num_writes
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The num_writes file is read-only and specifies the number of
writes (failed or successful) done on this device.
Now accessible via zram<id>/stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/invalid_io
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The invalid_io file is read-only and specifies the number of
non-page-size-aligned I/O requests issued to this device.
Now accessible via zram<id>/io_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/failed_reads
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The failed_reads file is read-only and specifies the number of
failed reads happened on this device.
Now accessible via zram<id>/io_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/failed_writes
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The failed_writes file is read-only and specifies the number of
failed writes happened on this device.
Now accessible via zram<id>/io_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/notify_free
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The notify_free file is read-only. Depending on device usage
scenario it may account a) the number of pages freed because
of swap slot free notifications or b) the number of pages freed
because of REQ_DISCARD requests sent by bio. The former ones
are sent to a swap block device when a swap slot is freed, which
implies that this disk is being used as a swap disk. The latter
ones are sent by filesystem mounted with discard option,
whenever some data blocks are getting discarded.
Now accessible via zram<id>/io_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/zero_pages
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The zero_pages file is read-only and specifies number of zero
filled pages written to this disk. No memory is allocated for
such pages.
Now accessible via zram<id>/mm_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/orig_data_size
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The orig_data_size file is read-only and specifies uncompressed
size of data stored in this disk. This excludes zero-filled
pages (zero_pages) since no memory is allocated for them.
Unit: bytes
Now accessible via zram<id>/mm_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/compr_data_size
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The compr_data_size file is read-only and specifies compressed
size of data stored in this disk. So, compression ratio can be
calculated using orig_data_size and this statistic.
Unit: bytes
Now accessible via zram<id>/mm_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/mem_used_total
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The mem_used_total file is read-only and specifies the amount
of memory, including allocator fragmentation and metadata
overhead, allocated for this disk. So, allocator space
efficiency can be calculated using compr_data_size and this
statistic.
Unit: bytes
Now accessible via zram<id>/mm_stat node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/mem_used_max
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The mem_used_max file is read/write and specifies the amount
of maximum memory zram have consumed to store compressed data.
For resetting the value, you should write "0". Otherwise,
you could see -EINVAL.
Unit: bytes
Downgraded to write-only node: so it's possible to set new
value only; its current value is stored in zram<id>/mm_stat
node.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/mem_limit
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The mem_limit file is read/write and specifies the maximum
amount of memory ZRAM can use to store the compressed data.
The limit could be changed in run time and "0" means disable
the limit. No limit is the initial state. Unit: bytes
Downgraded to write-only node: so it's possible to set new
value only; its current value is stored in zram<id>/mm_stat
node.

View File

@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
# Note: This documents additional properties of any device beyond what
# is documented in Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
What: /sys/devices/*/of_path
Date: February 2015
Contact: Device Tree mailing list <devicetree@vger.kernel.org>
Description:
Any device associated with a device-tree node will have
an of_path symlink pointing to the corresponding device
node in /sys/firmware/devicetree/

View File

@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/w1/devices/.../w1_seq
Date: Apr 2015
Contact: Matt Campbell <mattrcampbell@gmail.com>
Description: Support for the DS28EA00 chain sequence function
see Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_therm for detailed information
Users: any user space application which wants to communicate with DS28EA00

View File

@@ -5,4 +5,4 @@ Description:
The attributes:
qlen - depth of loopback queue
buflen - buffer length
bulk_buflen - buffer length

View File

@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
What: /config/usb-gadget/gadget/functions/printer.name
Date: Apr 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Description:
The attributes:
pnp_string - Data to be passed to the host in pnp string
q_len - Number of requests per endpoint

View File

@@ -9,4 +9,4 @@ Description:
isoc_maxpacket - 0 - 1023 (fs), 0 - 1024 (hs/ss)
isoc_mult - 0..2 (hs/ss only)
isoc_maxburst - 0..15 (ss only)
buflen - buffer length
qlen - buffer length

View File

@@ -20,19 +20,17 @@ Description:
action: measure | dont_measure | appraise | dont_appraise | audit
condition:= base | lsm [option]
base: [[func=] [mask=] [fsmagic=] [fsuuid=] [uid=]
[euid=] [fowner=]]
[fowner]]
lsm: [[subj_user=] [subj_role=] [subj_type=]
[obj_user=] [obj_role=] [obj_type=]]
option: [[appraise_type=]] [permit_directio]
base: func:= [BPRM_CHECK][MMAP_CHECK][FILE_CHECK][MODULE_CHECK]
[FIRMWARE_CHECK]
mask:= [[^]MAY_READ] [[^]MAY_WRITE] [[^]MAY_APPEND]
[[^]MAY_EXEC]
mask:= [MAY_READ] [MAY_WRITE] [MAY_APPEND] [MAY_EXEC]
fsmagic:= hex value
fsuuid:= file system UUID (e.g 8bcbe394-4f13-4144-be8e-5aa9ea2ce2f6)
uid:= decimal value
euid:= decimal value
fowner:=decimal value
lsm: are LSM specific
option: appraise_type:= [imasig]
@@ -51,25 +49,11 @@ Description:
dont_measure fsmagic=0x01021994
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x01021994
# RAMFS_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x858458f6
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x858458f6
# DEVPTS_SUPER_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x1cd1
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x1cd1
# BINFMTFS_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x42494e4d
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x42494e4d
# SECURITYFS_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x73636673
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x73636673
# SELINUX_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0xf97cff8c
dont_appraise fsmagic=0xf97cff8c
# CGROUP_SUPER_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x27e0eb
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x27e0eb
# NSFS_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0x6e736673
dont_appraise fsmagic=0x6e736673
measure func=BPRM_CHECK
measure func=FILE_MMAP mask=MAY_EXEC
@@ -86,6 +70,10 @@ Description:
Examples of LSM specific definitions:
SELinux:
# SELINUX_MAGIC
dont_measure fsmagic=0xf97cff8c
dont_appraise fsmagic=0xf97cff8c
dont_measure obj_type=var_log_t
dont_appraise obj_type=var_log_t
dont_measure obj_type=auditd_log_t

View File

@@ -90,17 +90,6 @@ gscr
130: SATA_PMP_GSCR_SII_GPIO
Only valid if the device is a PM.
trim
Shows the DSM TRIM mode currently used by the device. Valid
values are:
unsupported: Drive does not support DSM TRIM
unqueued: Drive supports unqueued DSM TRIM only
queued: Drive supports queued DSM TRIM
forced_unqueued: Drive's unqueued DSM support is known to be
buggy and only unqueued TRIM commands
are sent
spdn_cnt
Number of time libata decided to lower the speed of link due to errors.

View File

@@ -23,25 +23,3 @@ Description: Device-mapper device suspend state.
Contains the value 1 while the device is suspended.
Otherwise it contains 0. Read-only attribute.
Users: util-linux, device-mapper udev rules
What: /sys/block/dm-<num>/dm/rq_based_seq_io_merge_deadline
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: dm-devel@redhat.com
Description: Allow control over how long a request that is a
reasonable merge candidate can be queued on the request
queue. The resolution of this deadline is in
microseconds (ranging from 1 to 100000 usecs).
Setting this attribute to 0 (the default) will disable
request-based DM's merge heuristic and associated extra
accounting. This attribute is not applicable to
bio-based DM devices so it will only ever report 0 for
them.
What: /sys/block/dm-<num>/dm/use_blk_mq
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: dm-devel@redhat.com
Description: Request-based Device-mapper blk-mq I/O path mode.
Contains the value 1 if the device is using blk-mq.
Otherwise it contains 0. Read-only attribute.

View File

@@ -141,28 +141,3 @@ Description:
amount of memory ZRAM can use to store the compressed data. The
limit could be changed in run time and "0" means disable the
limit. No limit is the initial state. Unit: bytes
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/compact
Date: August 2015
Contact: Minchan Kim <minchan@kernel.org>
Description:
The compact file is write-only and trigger compaction for
allocator zrm uses. The allocator moves some objects so that
it could free fragment space.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/io_stat
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The io_stat file is read-only and accumulates device's I/O
statistics not accounted by block layer. For example,
failed_reads, failed_writes, etc. File format is similar to
block layer statistics file format.
What: /sys/block/zram<id>/mm_stat
Date: August 2015
Contact: Sergey Senozhatsky <sergey.senozhatsky@gmail.com>
Description:
The mm_stat file is read-only and represents device's mm
statistics (orig_data_size, compr_data_size, etc.) in a format
similar to block layer statistics file format.

View File

@@ -253,8 +253,6 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_humidityrelative_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_magn_offset
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_rot_offset
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -298,7 +296,6 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_humidityrelative_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_velocity_sqrt(x^2+y^2+z^2)_scale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_scale
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -339,7 +336,6 @@ what /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_illuminance0_calibscale
what /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_proximity0_calibscale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressureY_calibscale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_pressure_calibscale
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_calibscale
KernelVersion: 2.6.35
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -351,7 +347,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_activity_calibgender
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_energy_calibgender
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_distance_calibgender
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_velocity_calibgender
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Gender of the user (e.g.: male, female) used by some pedometers
@@ -362,7 +358,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_activity_calibgender_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_energy_calibgender_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_distance_calibgender_available
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_velocity_calibgender_available
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Lists all available gender values (e.g.: male, female).
@@ -379,7 +375,7 @@ Description:
type.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_energy_calibweight
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Weight of the user (in kg). It is needed by some pedometers
@@ -616,8 +612,6 @@ Description:
a given event type is enabled a future point (and not those for
whatever event was previously enabled).
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_thresh_rising_value
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_thresh_falling_value
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_raw_thresh_rising_value
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_raw_thresh_falling_value
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_y_raw_thresh_rising_value
@@ -667,24 +661,6 @@ Description:
value is in raw device units or in processed units (as _raw
and _input do on sysfs direct channel read attributes).
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_peak_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_anglvel_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_magn_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_rot_from_north_magnetic_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_rot_from_north_true_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_voltage_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_voltage_supply_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_temp_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_illuminance_scale
What: /sys/.../events/in_proximity_scale
KernelVersion: 3.21
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies the conversion factor from the standard units
to device specific units used to set the event trigger
threshold.
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_rising_hysteresis
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_falling_hysteresis
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_either_hysteresis
@@ -800,7 +776,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_rising_period
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_thresh_falling_period
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_roc_rising_period
hat: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_roc_rising_period
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_x_roc_falling_period
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_y_thresh_rising_period
What: /sys/.../events/in_accel_y_thresh_falling_period
@@ -947,7 +923,7 @@ Description:
this type.
What: /sys/.../events/in_steps_change_en
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Event generated when channel passes a threshold on the absolute
@@ -956,7 +932,7 @@ Description:
in_steps_change_value.
What: /sys/.../events/in_steps_change_value
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies the value of change threshold that the
@@ -1021,7 +997,6 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_incli_y_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_rot_quaternion_en
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_proximity_en
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -1038,7 +1013,6 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_timestamp_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_rot_quaternion_type
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_proximity_type
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -1090,7 +1064,6 @@ What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_timestamp_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressureY_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_pressure_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_rot_quaternion_index
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/scan_elements/in_proximity_index
KernelVersion: 2.6.37
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -1131,7 +1104,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_energy_input
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_energy_raw
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
This attribute is used to read the energy value reported by the
@@ -1140,7 +1113,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_distance_input
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_distance_raw
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
This attribute is used to read the distance covered by the user
@@ -1165,16 +1138,14 @@ Description:
object is near the sensor, usually be observing
reflectivity of infrared or ultrasound emitted.
Often these sensors are unit less and as such conversion
to SI units is not possible. Higher proximity measurements
indicate closer objects, and vice versa.
to SI units is not possible. Where it is, the units should
be meters. If such a conversion is not possible, the reported
values should behave in the same way as a distance, i.e. lower
values indicate something is closer to the sensor.
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_input
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_raw
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminanceY_input
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminanceY_raw
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminanceY_mean_raw
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_ir_raw
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_illuminance_clear_raw
KernelVersion: 3.4
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
@@ -1203,7 +1174,7 @@ Description:
seconds.
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_velocity_sqrt(x^2+y^2+z^2)_integration_time
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Number of seconds in which to compute speed.
@@ -1265,7 +1236,7 @@ Description:
Units after application of scale are m/s.
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_steps_debounce_count
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies the number of steps that must occur within
@@ -1273,92 +1244,8 @@ Description:
consumer is making steps.
What: /sys/.../iio:deviceX/in_steps_debounce_time
KernelVersion: 4.0
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies number of seconds in which we compute the steps
that occur in order to decide if the consumer is making steps.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/watermark
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A single positive integer specifying the maximum number of scan
elements to wait for.
Poll will block until the watermark is reached.
Blocking read will wait until the minimum between the requested
read amount or the low water mark is available.
Non-blocking read will retrieve the available samples from the
buffer even if there are less samples then watermark level. This
allows the application to block on poll with a timeout and read
the available samples after the timeout expires and thus have a
maximum delay guarantee.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_enabled
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A read-only boolean value that indicates if the hardware fifo is
currently enabled or disabled. If the device does not have a
hardware fifo this entry is not present.
The hardware fifo is enabled when the buffer is enabled if the
current hardware fifo watermark level is set and other current
device settings allows it (e.g. if a trigger is set that samples
data differently that the hardware fifo does then hardware fifo
will not enabled).
If the hardware fifo is enabled and the level of the hardware
fifo reaches the hardware fifo watermark level the device will
flush its hardware fifo to the device buffer. Doing a non
blocking read on the device when no samples are present in the
device buffer will also force a flush.
When the hardware fifo is enabled there is no need to use a
trigger to use buffer mode since the watermark settings
guarantees that the hardware fifo is flushed to the device
buffer.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_watermark
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Read-only entry that contains a single integer specifying the
current watermark level for the hardware fifo. If the device
does not have a hardware fifo this entry is not present.
The watermark level for the hardware fifo is set by the driver
based on the value set by the user in buffer/watermark but
taking into account hardware limitations (e.g. most hardware
buffers are limited to 32-64 samples, some hardware buffers
watermarks are fixed or have minimum levels). A value of 0
means that the hardware watermark is unset.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_watermark_min
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A single positive integer specifying the minimum watermark level
for the hardware fifo of this device. If the device does not
have a hardware fifo this entry is not present.
If the user sets buffer/watermark to a value less than this one,
then the hardware watermark will remain unset.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_watermark_max
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A single positive integer specifying the maximum watermark level
for the hardware fifo of this device. If the device does not
have a hardware fifo this entry is not present.
If the user sets buffer/watermark to a value greater than this
one, then the hardware watermark will be capped at this value.
What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/hwfifo_watermark_available
KernelVersion: 4.2
Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A list of positive integers specifying the available watermark
levels for the hardware fifo. This entry is optional and if it
is not present it means that all the values between
hwfifo_watermark_min and hwfifo_watermark_max are supported.
If the user sets buffer/watermark to a value greater than
hwfifo_watermak_min but not equal to any of the values in this
list, the driver will chose an appropriate value for the
hardware fifo watermark level.

View File

@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Description: read only
Hexadecimal value of the device ID found in this AFU
configuration record.
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/cr<config num>/class
What: /sys/class/cxl/<afu>/cr<config num>/vendor
Date: February 2015
Contact: linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org
Description: read only

View File

@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/flash_brightness
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read/write
Set the brightness of this LED in the flash strobe mode, in
microamperes. The file is created only for the flash LED devices
that support setting flash brightness.
The value is between 0 and
/sys/class/leds/<led>/max_flash_brightness.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/max_flash_brightness
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read only
Maximum brightness level for this LED in the flash strobe mode,
in microamperes.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/flash_timeout
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read/write
Hardware timeout for flash, in microseconds. The flash strobe
is stopped after this period of time has passed from the start
of the strobe. The file is created only for the flash LED
devices that support setting flash timeout.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/max_flash_timeout
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read only
Maximum flash timeout for this LED, in microseconds.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/flash_strobe
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read/write
Flash strobe state. When written with 1 it triggers flash strobe
and when written with 0 it turns the flash off.
On read 1 means that flash is currently strobing and 0 means
that flash is off.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/flash_fault
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Jacek Anaszewski <j.anaszewski@samsung.com>
Description: read only
Space separated list of flash faults that may have occurred.
Flash faults are re-read after strobing the flash. Possible
flash faults:
* led-over-voltage - flash controller voltage to the flash LED
has exceeded the limit specific to the flash controller
* flash-timeout-exceeded - the flash strobe was still on when
the timeout set by the user has expired; not all flash
controllers may set this in all such conditions
* controller-over-temperature - the flash controller has
overheated
* controller-short-circuit - the short circuit protection
of the flash controller has been triggered
* led-power-supply-over-current - current in the LED power
supply has exceeded the limit specific to the flash
controller
* indicator-led-fault - the flash controller has detected
a short or open circuit condition on the indicator LED
* led-under-voltage - flash controller voltage to the flash
LED has been below the minimum limit specific to
the flash
* controller-under-voltage - the input voltage of the flash
controller is below the limit under which strobing the
flash at full current will not be possible;
the condition persists until this flag is no longer set
* led-over-temperature - the temperature of the LED has exceeded
its allowed upper limit

View File

@@ -222,13 +222,3 @@ Description:
The number of blocks that are marked as reserved, if any, in
this partition. These are typically used to store the in-flash
bad block table (BBT).
What: /sys/class/mtd/mtdX/offset
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
Description:
For a partition, the offset of that partition from the start
of the master device in bytes. This attribute is absent on
main devices, so it can be used to distinguish between
partitions and devices that aren't partitions.

View File

@@ -188,14 +188,6 @@ Description:
Indicates the interface unique physical port identifier within
the NIC, as a string.
What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/phys_port_name
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Indicates the interface physical port name within the NIC,
as a string.
What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/speed
Date: October 2009
KernelVersion: 2.6.33

View File

@@ -24,14 +24,6 @@ Description:
Indicates the number of transmit timeout events seen by this
network interface transmit queue.
What: /sys/class/<iface>/queues/tx-<queue>/tx_maxrate
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org
Description:
A Mbps max-rate set for the queue, a value of zero means disabled,
default is disabled.
What: /sys/class/<iface>/queues/tx-<queue>/xps_cpus
Date: November 2010
KernelVersion: 2.6.38

View File

@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Description: Discover CPUs in the same CPU frequency coordination domain
What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/cache/index3/cache_disable_{0,1}
Date: August 2008
KernelVersion: 2.6.27
Contact: Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
Contact: discuss@x86-64.org
Description: Disable L3 cache indices
These files exist in every CPU's cache/index3 directory. Each

View File

@@ -8,13 +8,3 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the device's raw binary HID
report descriptor.
This file cannot be written.
Users: HIDAPI library (http://www.signal11.us/oss/hidapi)
What: For USB devices : /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/country
For BT devices : /sys/class/bluetooth/hci<addr>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/country
Symlink : /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw<num>/device/country
Date: February 2015
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Olivier Gay <ogay@logitech.com>
Description: When read, this file returns the hex integer value in ASCII
of the device's HID country code (e.g. 21 for US).
This file cannot be written.

View File

@@ -5,48 +5,3 @@ Contact: Michal Malý <madcatxster@gmail.com>
Description: Display minimum, maximum and current range of the steering
wheel. Writing a value within min and max boundaries sets the
range of the wheel.
What: /sys/bus/hid/drivers/logitech/<dev>/alternate_modes
Date: Feb 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: Michal Malý <madcatxster@gmail.com>
Description: Displays a set of alternate modes supported by a wheel. Each
mode is listed as follows:
Tag: Mode Name
Currently active mode is marked with an asterisk. List also
contains an abstract item "native" which always denotes the
native mode of the wheel. Echoing the mode tag switches the
wheel into the corresponding mode. Depending on the exact model
of the wheel not all listed modes might always be selectable.
If a wheel cannot be switched into the desired mode, -EINVAL
is returned accompanied with an explanatory message in the
kernel log.
This entry is not created for devices that have only one mode.
Currently supported mode switches:
Driving Force Pro:
DF-EX --> DFP
G25:
DF-EX --> DFP --> G25
G27:
DF-EX <*> DFP <-> G25 <-> G27
DF-EX <*--------> G25 <-> G27
DF-EX <*----------------> G27
DFGT:
DF-EX <*> DFP <-> DFGT
DF-EX <*--------> DFGT
* hid_logitech module must be loaded with lg4ff_no_autoswitch=1
parameter set in order for the switch to DF-EX mode to work.
What: /sys/bus/hid/drivers/logitech/<dev>/real_id
Date: Feb 2015
KernelVersion: 4.1
Contact: Michal Malý <madcatxster@gmail.com>
Description: Displays the real model of the wheel regardless of any
alternate mode the wheel might be switched to.
It is a read-only value.
This entry is not created for devices that have only one mode.

View File

@@ -8,11 +8,9 @@ Description: This file controls the keyboard backlight operation mode, valid
* 0x2 -> AUTO (also called TIMER)
* 0x8 -> ON
* 0x10 -> OFF
Note that from kernel 3.16 onwards this file accepts all listed
Note that the kernel 3.16 onwards this file accepts all listed
parameters, kernel 3.15 only accepts the first two (FN-Z and
AUTO).
Also note that toggling this value on type 1 devices, requires
a reboot for changes to take effect.
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/kbd_backlight_timeout
@@ -69,72 +67,15 @@ Description: This file shows the current keyboard backlight type,
* 2 -> Type 2, supporting modes TIMER, ON and OFF
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/usb_sleep_charge
Date: January 23, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the USB Sleep & Charge charging mode, which
can be:
* 0 -> Disabled (0x00)
* 1 -> Alternate (0x09)
* 2 -> Auto (0x21)
* 3 -> Typical (0x11)
Note that from kernel 4.1 onwards this file accepts all listed
values, kernel 4.0 only supports the first three.
Note that this feature only works when connected to power, if
you want to use it under battery, see the entry named
"sleep_functions_on_battery"
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/sleep_functions_on_battery
Date: January 23, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the USB Sleep Functions under battery, and
set the level at which point they will be disabled, accepted
values can be:
* 0 -> Disabled
* 1-100 -> Battery level to disable sleep functions
Currently it prints two values, the first one indicates if the
feature is enabled or disabled, while the second one shows the
current battery level set.
Note that when the value is set to disabled, the sleep function
will only work when connected to power.
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/usb_rapid_charge
Date: January 23, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the USB Rapid Charge state, which can be:
* 0 -> Disabled
* 1 -> Enabled
Note that toggling this value requires a reboot for changes to
take effect.
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/usb_sleep_music
Date: January 23, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the Sleep & Music state, which values can be:
* 0 -> Disabled
* 1 -> Enabled
Note that this feature only works when connected to power, if
you want to use it under battery, see the entry named
"sleep_functions_on_battery"
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/version
Date: February 12, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Date: February, 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file shows the current version of the driver
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/fan
Date: February 12, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Date: February, 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the state of the internal fan, valid
values are:
@@ -142,8 +83,8 @@ Description: This file controls the state of the internal fan, valid
* 1 -> ON
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/kbd_function_keys
Date: February 12, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Date: February, 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the Special Functions (hotkeys) operation
mode, valid values are:
@@ -153,29 +94,21 @@ Description: This file controls the Special Functions (hotkeys) operation
and the hotkeys are accessed via FN-F{1-12}.
In the "Special Functions" mode, the F{1-12} keys trigger the
hotkey and the F{1-12} keys are accessed via FN-F{1-12}.
Note that toggling this value requires a reboot for changes to
take effect.
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/panel_power_on
Date: February 12, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Date: February, 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls whether the laptop should turn ON whenever
the LID is opened, valid values are:
* 0 -> Disabled
* 1 -> Enabled
Note that toggling this value requires a reboot for changes to
take effect.
Users: KToshiba
What: /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS{1900,620{0,7,8}}:00/usb_three
Date: February 12, 2015
KernelVersion: 4.0
Date: February, 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
Contact: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
Description: This file controls the USB 3 functionality, valid values are:
Description: This file controls whether the USB 3 functionality, valid
values are:
* 0 -> Disabled (Acts as a regular USB 2)
* 1 -> Enabled (Full USB 3 functionality)
Note that toggling this value requires a reboot for changes to
take effect.
Users: KToshiba

View File

@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/als_enabled
Date: December 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Gabriele Mazzotta <gabriele.mzt@gmail.com>,
Pali Rohár <pali.rohar@gmail.com>
Description:
This file allows to control the automatic keyboard
illumination mode on some systems that have an ambient
light sensor. Write 1 to this file to enable the auto
mode, 0 to disable it.
What: /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/als_setting
Date: December 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Gabriele Mazzotta <gabriele.mzt@gmail.com>,
Pali Rohár <pali.rohar@gmail.com>
Description:
This file allows to specifiy the on/off threshold value,
as reported by the ambient light sensor.
What: /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/start_triggers
Date: December 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Gabriele Mazzotta <gabriele.mzt@gmail.com>,
Pali Rohár <pali.rohar@gmail.com>
Description:
This file allows to control the input triggers that
turn on the keyboard backlight illumination that is
disabled because of inactivity.
Read the file to see the triggers available. The ones
enabled are preceded by '+', those disabled by '-'.
To enable a trigger, write its name preceded by '+' to
this file. To disable a trigger, write its name preceded
by '-' instead.
For example, to enable the keyboard as trigger run:
echo +keyboard > /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/start_triggers
To disable it:
echo -keyboard > /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/start_triggers
Note that not all the available triggers can be configured.
What: /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/stop_timeout
Date: December 2014
KernelVersion: 3.19
Contact: Gabriele Mazzotta <gabriele.mzt@gmail.com>,
Pali Rohár <pali.rohar@gmail.com>
Description:
This file allows to specify the interval after which the
keyboard illumination is disabled because of inactivity.
The timeouts are expressed in seconds, minutes, hours and
days, for which the symbols are 's', 'm', 'h' and 'd'
respectively.
To configure the timeout, write to this file a value along
with any the above units. If no unit is specified, the value
is assumed to be expressed in seconds.
For example, to set the timeout to 10 minutes run:
echo 10m > /sys/class/leds/dell::kbd_backlight/stop_timeout
Note that when this file is read, the returned value might be
expressed in a different unit than the one used when the timeout
was set.
Also note that only some timeouts are supported and that
some systems might fall back to a specific timeout in case
an invalid timeout is written to this file.

View File

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ and NOT read it. Burn them, it's a great symbolic gesture.
Anyway, here goes:
Chapter 1: Indentation
Chapter 1: Indentation
Tabs are 8 characters, and thus indentations are also 8 characters.
There are heretic movements that try to make indentations 4 (or even 2!)
@@ -56,6 +56,7 @@ instead of "double-indenting" the "case" labels. E.g.:
break;
}
Don't put multiple statements on a single line unless you have
something to hide:
@@ -155,25 +156,25 @@ comments on.
Do not unnecessarily use braces where a single statement will do.
if (condition)
action();
if (condition)
action();
and
if (condition)
do_this();
else
do_that();
if (condition)
do_this();
else
do_that();
This does not apply if only one branch of a conditional statement is a single
statement; in the latter case use braces in both branches:
if (condition) {
do_this();
do_that();
} else {
otherwise();
}
if (condition) {
do_this();
do_that();
} else {
otherwise();
}
3.1: Spaces
@@ -185,11 +186,8 @@ although they are not required in the language, as in: "sizeof info" after
"struct fileinfo info;" is declared).
So use a space after these keywords:
if, switch, case, for, do, while
but not with sizeof, typeof, alignof, or __attribute__. E.g.,
s = sizeof(struct file);
Do not add spaces around (inside) parenthesized expressions. This example is
@@ -211,15 +209,12 @@ such as any of these:
= + - < > * / % | & ^ <= >= == != ? :
but no space after unary operators:
& * + - ~ ! sizeof typeof alignof __attribute__ defined
no space before the postfix increment & decrement unary operators:
++ --
no space after the prefix increment & decrement unary operators:
++ --
and no space around the '.' and "->" structure member operators.
@@ -273,11 +268,13 @@ See chapter 6 (Functions).
Chapter 5: Typedefs
Please don't use things like "vps_t".
It's a _mistake_ to use typedef for structures and pointers. When you see a
vps_t a;
in the source, what does it mean?
In contrast, if it says
struct virtual_container *a;
@@ -375,11 +372,11 @@ In source files, separate functions with one blank line. If the function is
exported, the EXPORT* macro for it should follow immediately after the closing
function brace line. E.g.:
int system_is_up(void)
{
return system_state == SYSTEM_RUNNING;
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(system_is_up);
int system_is_up(void)
{
return system_state == SYSTEM_RUNNING;
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(system_is_up);
In function prototypes, include parameter names with their data types.
Although this is not required by the C language, it is preferred in Linux
@@ -408,34 +405,34 @@ The rationale for using gotos is:
modifications are prevented
- saves the compiler work to optimize redundant code away ;)
int fun(int a)
{
int result = 0;
char *buffer;
int fun(int a)
{
int result = 0;
char *buffer;
buffer = kmalloc(SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!buffer)
return -ENOMEM;
buffer = kmalloc(SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!buffer)
return -ENOMEM;
if (condition1) {
while (loop1) {
...
}
result = 1;
goto out_buffer;
if (condition1) {
while (loop1) {
...
}
...
out_buffer:
kfree(buffer);
return result;
result = 1;
goto out_buffer;
}
...
out_buffer:
kfree(buffer);
return result;
}
A common type of bug to be aware of it "one err bugs" which look like this:
err:
kfree(foo->bar);
kfree(foo);
return ret;
err:
kfree(foo->bar);
kfree(foo);
return ret;
The bug in this code is that on some exit paths "foo" is NULL. Normally the
fix for this is to split it up into two error labels "err_bar:" and "err_foo:".
@@ -506,9 +503,9 @@ values. To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file:
(defun c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only (ignored)
"Line up argument lists by tabs, not spaces"
(let* ((anchor (c-langelem-pos c-syntactic-element))
(column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element))
(offset (- (1+ column) anchor))
(steps (floor offset c-basic-offset)))
(column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element))
(offset (- (1+ column) anchor))
(steps (floor offset c-basic-offset)))
(* (max steps 1)
c-basic-offset)))
@@ -615,7 +612,7 @@ have a reference count on it, you almost certainly have a bug.
Names of macros defining constants and labels in enums are capitalized.
#define CONSTANT 0x12345
#define CONSTANT 0x12345
Enums are preferred when defining several related constants.
@@ -626,28 +623,28 @@ Generally, inline functions are preferable to macros resembling functions.
Macros with multiple statements should be enclosed in a do - while block:
#define macrofun(a, b, c) \
do { \
if (a == 5) \
do_this(b, c); \
} while (0)
#define macrofun(a, b, c) \
do { \
if (a == 5) \
do_this(b, c); \
} while (0)
Things to avoid when using macros:
1) macros that affect control flow:
#define FOO(x) \
do { \
if (blah(x) < 0) \
return -EBUGGERED; \
} while(0)
#define FOO(x) \
do { \
if (blah(x) < 0) \
return -EBUGGERED; \
} while(0)
is a _very_ bad idea. It looks like a function call but exits the "calling"
function; don't break the internal parsers of those who will read the code.
2) macros that depend on having a local variable with a magic name:
#define FOO(val) bar(index, val)
#define FOO(val) bar(index, val)
might look like a good thing, but it's confusing as hell when one reads the
code and it's prone to breakage from seemingly innocent changes.
@@ -659,21 +656,8 @@ bite you if somebody e.g. turns FOO into an inline function.
must enclose the expression in parentheses. Beware of similar issues with
macros using parameters.
#define CONSTANT 0x4000
#define CONSTEXP (CONSTANT | 3)
5) namespace collisions when defining local variables in macros resembling
functions:
#define FOO(x) \
({ \
typeof(x) ret; \
ret = calc_ret(x); \
(ret); \
)}
ret is a common name for a local variable - __foo_ret is less likely
to collide with an existing variable.
#define CONSTANT 0x4000
#define CONSTEXP (CONSTANT | 3)
The cpp manual deals with macros exhaustively. The gcc internals manual also
covers RTL which is used frequently with assembly language in the kernel.
@@ -812,11 +796,11 @@ you should use, rather than explicitly coding some variant of them yourself.
For example, if you need to calculate the length of an array, take advantage
of the macro
#define ARRAY_SIZE(x) (sizeof(x) / sizeof((x)[0]))
#define ARRAY_SIZE(x) (sizeof(x) / sizeof((x)[0]))
Similarly, if you need to calculate the size of some structure member, use
#define FIELD_SIZEOF(t, f) (sizeof(((t*)0)->f))
#define FIELD_SIZEOF(t, f) (sizeof(((t*)0)->f))
There are also min() and max() macros that do strict type checking if you
need them. Feel free to peruse that header file to see what else is already
@@ -829,19 +813,19 @@ Some editors can interpret configuration information embedded in source files,
indicated with special markers. For example, emacs interprets lines marked
like this:
-*- mode: c -*-
-*- mode: c -*-
Or like this:
/*
Local Variables:
compile-command: "gcc -DMAGIC_DEBUG_FLAG foo.c"
End:
*/
/*
Local Variables:
compile-command: "gcc -DMAGIC_DEBUG_FLAG foo.c"
End:
*/
Vim interprets markers that look like this:
/* vim:set sw=8 noet */
/* vim:set sw=8 noet */
Do not include any of these in source files. People have their own personal
editor configurations, and your source files should not override them. This
@@ -918,9 +902,9 @@ At the end of any non-trivial #if or #ifdef block (more than a few lines),
place a comment after the #endif on the same line, noting the conditional
expression used. For instance:
#ifdef CONFIG_SOMETHING
...
#endif /* CONFIG_SOMETHING */
#ifdef CONFIG_SOMETHING
...
#endif /* CONFIG_SOMETHING */
Appendix I: References

View File

@@ -25,18 +25,13 @@ physical addresses. These are the addresses in /proc/iomem. The physical
address is not directly useful to a driver; it must use ioremap() to map
the space and produce a virtual address.
I/O devices use a third kind of address: a "bus address". If a device has
registers at an MMIO address, or if it performs DMA to read or write system
memory, the addresses used by the device are bus addresses. In some
systems, bus addresses are identical to CPU physical addresses, but in
general they are not. IOMMUs and host bridges can produce arbitrary
I/O devices use a third kind of address: a "bus address" or "DMA address".
If a device has registers at an MMIO address, or if it performs DMA to read
or write system memory, the addresses used by the device are bus addresses.
In some systems, bus addresses are identical to CPU physical addresses, but
in general they are not. IOMMUs and host bridges can produce arbitrary
mappings between physical and bus addresses.
From a device's point of view, DMA uses the bus address space, but it may
be restricted to a subset of that space. For example, even if a system
supports 64-bit addresses for main memory and PCI BARs, it may use an IOMMU
so devices only need to use 32-bit DMA addresses.
Here's a picture and some examples:
CPU CPU Bus
@@ -77,11 +72,11 @@ can use virtual address X to access the buffer, but the device itself
cannot because DMA doesn't go through the CPU virtual memory system.
In some simple systems, the device can do DMA directly to physical address
Y. But in many others, there is IOMMU hardware that translates DMA
Y. But in many others, there is IOMMU hardware that translates bus
addresses to physical addresses, e.g., it translates Z to Y. This is part
of the reason for the DMA API: the driver can give a virtual address X to
an interface like dma_map_single(), which sets up any required IOMMU
mapping and returns the DMA address Z. The driver then tells the device to
mapping and returns the bus address Z. The driver then tells the device to
do DMA to Z, and the IOMMU maps it to the buffer at address Y in system
RAM.
@@ -103,7 +98,7 @@ First of all, you should make sure
#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
is in your driver, which provides the definition of dma_addr_t. This type
can hold any valid DMA address for the platform and should be used
can hold any valid DMA or bus address for the platform and should be used
everywhere you hold a DMA address returned from the DMA mapping functions.
What memory is DMA'able?
@@ -321,7 +316,7 @@ There are two types of DMA mappings:
Think of "consistent" as "synchronous" or "coherent".
The current default is to return consistent memory in the low 32
bits of the DMA space. However, for future compatibility you should
bits of the bus space. However, for future compatibility you should
set the consistent mask even if this default is fine for your
driver.
@@ -408,7 +403,7 @@ dma_alloc_coherent() returns two values: the virtual address which you
can use to access it from the CPU and dma_handle which you pass to the
card.
The CPU virtual address and the DMA address are both
The CPU virtual address and the DMA bus address are both
guaranteed to be aligned to the smallest PAGE_SIZE order which
is greater than or equal to the requested size. This invariant
exists (for example) to guarantee that if you allocate a chunk
@@ -650,8 +645,8 @@ PLEASE NOTE: The 'nents' argument to the dma_unmap_sg call must be
dma_map_sg call.
Every dma_map_{single,sg}() call should have its dma_unmap_{single,sg}()
counterpart, because the DMA address space is a shared resource and
you could render the machine unusable by consuming all DMA addresses.
counterpart, because the bus address space is a shared resource and
you could render the machine unusable by consuming all bus addresses.
If you need to use the same streaming DMA region multiple times and touch
the data in between the DMA transfers, the buffer needs to be synced

View File

@@ -18,10 +18,10 @@ Part I - dma_ API
To get the dma_ API, you must #include <linux/dma-mapping.h>. This
provides dma_addr_t and the interfaces described below.
A dma_addr_t can hold any valid DMA address for the platform. It can be
given to a device to use as a DMA source or target. A CPU cannot reference
a dma_addr_t directly because there may be translation between its physical
address space and the DMA address space.
A dma_addr_t can hold any valid DMA or bus address for the platform. It
can be given to a device to use as a DMA source or target. A CPU cannot
reference a dma_addr_t directly because there may be translation between
its physical address space and the bus address space.
Part Ia - Using large DMA-coherent buffers
------------------------------------------
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ It returns a pointer to the allocated region (in the processor's virtual
address space) or NULL if the allocation failed.
It also returns a <dma_handle> which may be cast to an unsigned integer the
same width as the bus and given to the device as the DMA address base of
same width as the bus and given to the device as the bus address base of
the region.
Note: consistent memory can be expensive on some platforms, and the
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction direction)
Maps a piece of processor virtual memory so it can be accessed by the
device and returns the DMA address of the memory.
device and returns the bus address of the memory.
The direction for both APIs may be converted freely by casting.
However the dma_ API uses a strongly typed enumerator for its
@@ -212,20 +212,20 @@ contiguous piece of memory. For this reason, memory to be mapped by
this API should be obtained from sources which guarantee it to be
physically contiguous (like kmalloc).
Further, the DMA address of the memory must be within the
Further, the bus address of the memory must be within the
dma_mask of the device (the dma_mask is a bit mask of the
addressable region for the device, i.e., if the DMA address of
the memory ANDed with the dma_mask is still equal to the DMA
addressable region for the device, i.e., if the bus address of
the memory ANDed with the dma_mask is still equal to the bus
address, then the device can perform DMA to the memory). To
ensure that the memory allocated by kmalloc is within the dma_mask,
the driver may specify various platform-dependent flags to restrict
the DMA address range of the allocation (e.g., on x86, GFP_DMA
guarantees to be within the first 16MB of available DMA addresses,
the bus address range of the allocation (e.g., on x86, GFP_DMA
guarantees to be within the first 16MB of available bus addresses,
as required by ISA devices).
Note also that the above constraints on physical contiguity and
dma_mask may not apply if the platform has an IOMMU (a device which
maps an I/O DMA address to a physical memory address). However, to be
maps an I/O bus address to a physical memory address). However, to be
portable, device driver writers may *not* assume that such an IOMMU
exists.
@@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later).
dma_map_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
Returns: the number of DMA address segments mapped (this may be shorter
Returns: the number of bus address segments mapped (this may be shorter
than <nents> passed in if some elements of the scatter/gather list are
physically or virtually adjacent and an IOMMU maps them with a single
entry).
@@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ must be the same as those and passed in to the scatter/gather mapping
API.
Note: <nents> must be the number you passed in, *not* the number of
DMA address entries returned.
bus address entries returned.
void
dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
@@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ it's asked for coherent memory for this device.
phys_addr is the CPU physical address to which the memory is currently
assigned (this will be ioremapped so the CPU can access the region).
device_addr is the DMA address the device needs to be programmed
device_addr is the bus address the device needs to be programmed
with to actually address this memory (this will be handed out as the
dma_addr_t in dma_alloc_coherent()).

View File

@@ -509,270 +509,6 @@
select it due to the used type and mask field.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Internal Structure of Kernel Crypto API</title>
<para>
The kernel crypto API has an internal structure where a cipher
implementation may use many layers and indirections. This section
shall help to clarify how the kernel crypto API uses
various components to implement the complete cipher.
</para>
<para>
The following subsections explain the internal structure based
on existing cipher implementations. The first section addresses
the most complex scenario where all other scenarios form a logical
subset.
</para>
<sect2><title>Generic AEAD Cipher Structure</title>
<para>
The following ASCII art decomposes the kernel crypto API layers
when using the AEAD cipher with the automated IV generation. The
shown example is used by the IPSEC layer.
</para>
<para>
For other use cases of AEAD ciphers, the ASCII art applies as
well, but the caller may not use the GIVCIPHER interface. In
this case, the caller must generate the IV.
</para>
<para>
The depicted example decomposes the AEAD cipher of GCM(AES) based
on the generic C implementations (gcm.c, aes-generic.c, ctr.c,
ghash-generic.c, seqiv.c). The generic implementation serves as an
example showing the complete logic of the kernel crypto API.
</para>
<para>
It is possible that some streamlined cipher implementations (like
AES-NI) provide implementations merging aspects which in the view
of the kernel crypto API cannot be decomposed into layers any more.
In case of the AES-NI implementation, the CTR mode, the GHASH
implementation and the AES cipher are all merged into one cipher
implementation registered with the kernel crypto API. In this case,
the concept described by the following ASCII art applies too. However,
the decomposition of GCM into the individual sub-components
by the kernel crypto API is not done any more.
</para>
<para>
Each block in the following ASCII art is an independent cipher
instance obtained from the kernel crypto API. Each block
is accessed by the caller or by other blocks using the API functions
defined by the kernel crypto API for the cipher implementation type.
</para>
<para>
The blocks below indicate the cipher type as well as the specific
logic implemented in the cipher.
</para>
<para>
The ASCII art picture also indicates the call structure, i.e. who
calls which component. The arrows point to the invoked block
where the caller uses the API applicable to the cipher type
specified for the block.
</para>
<programlisting>
<![CDATA[
kernel crypto API | IPSEC Layer
|
+-----------+ |
| | (1)
| givcipher | <----------------------------------- esp_output
| (seqiv) | ---+
+-----------+ |
| (2)
+-----------+ |
| | <--+ (2)
| aead | <----------------------------------- esp_input
| (gcm) | ------------+
+-----------+ |
| (3) | (5)
v v
+-----------+ +-----------+
| | | |
| ablkcipher| | ahash |
| (ctr) | ---+ | (ghash) |
+-----------+ | +-----------+
|
+-----------+ | (4)
| | <--+
| cipher |
| (aes) |
+-----------+
]]>
</programlisting>
<para>
The following call sequence is applicable when the IPSEC layer
triggers an encryption operation with the esp_output function. During
configuration, the administrator set up the use of rfc4106(gcm(aes)) as
the cipher for ESP. The following call sequence is now depicted in the
ASCII art above:
</para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
esp_output() invokes crypto_aead_givencrypt() to trigger an encryption
operation of the GIVCIPHER implementation.
</para>
<para>
In case of GCM, the SEQIV implementation is registered as GIVCIPHER
in crypto_rfc4106_alloc().
</para>
<para>
The SEQIV performs its operation to generate an IV where the core
function is seqiv_geniv().
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
Now, SEQIV uses the AEAD API function calls to invoke the associated
AEAD cipher. In our case, during the instantiation of SEQIV, the
cipher handle for GCM is provided to SEQIV. This means that SEQIV
invokes AEAD cipher operations with the GCM cipher handle.
</para>
<para>
During instantiation of the GCM handle, the CTR(AES) and GHASH
ciphers are instantiated. The cipher handles for CTR(AES) and GHASH
are retained for later use.
</para>
<para>
The GCM implementation is responsible to invoke the CTR mode AES and
the GHASH cipher in the right manner to implement the GCM
specification.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
The GCM AEAD cipher type implementation now invokes the ABLKCIPHER API
with the instantiated CTR(AES) cipher handle.
</para>
<para>
During instantiation of the CTR(AES) cipher, the CIPHER type
implementation of AES is instantiated. The cipher handle for AES is
retained.
</para>
<para>
That means that the ABLKCIPHER implementation of CTR(AES) only
implements the CTR block chaining mode. After performing the block
chaining operation, the CIPHER implementation of AES is invoked.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
The ABLKCIPHER of CTR(AES) now invokes the CIPHER API with the AES
cipher handle to encrypt one block.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
The GCM AEAD implementation also invokes the GHASH cipher
implementation via the AHASH API.
</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
<para>
When the IPSEC layer triggers the esp_input() function, the same call
sequence is followed with the only difference that the operation starts
with step (2).
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2><title>Generic Block Cipher Structure</title>
<para>
Generic block ciphers follow the same concept as depicted with the ASCII
art picture above.
</para>
<para>
For example, CBC(AES) is implemented with cbc.c, and aes-generic.c. The
ASCII art picture above applies as well with the difference that only
step (4) is used and the ABLKCIPHER block chaining mode is CBC.
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2><title>Generic Keyed Message Digest Structure</title>
<para>
Keyed message digest implementations again follow the same concept as
depicted in the ASCII art picture above.
</para>
<para>
For example, HMAC(SHA256) is implemented with hmac.c and
sha256_generic.c. The following ASCII art illustrates the
implementation:
</para>
<programlisting>
<![CDATA[
kernel crypto API | Caller
|
+-----------+ (1) |
| | <------------------ some_function
| ahash |
| (hmac) | ---+
+-----------+ |
| (2)
+-----------+ |
| | <--+
| shash |
| (sha256) |
+-----------+
]]>
</programlisting>
<para>
The following call sequence is applicable when a caller triggers
an HMAC operation:
</para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
The AHASH API functions are invoked by the caller. The HMAC
implementation performs its operation as needed.
</para>
<para>
During initialization of the HMAC cipher, the SHASH cipher type of
SHA256 is instantiated. The cipher handle for the SHA256 instance is
retained.
</para>
<para>
At one time, the HMAC implementation requires a SHA256 operation
where the SHA256 cipher handle is used.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
The HMAC instance now invokes the SHASH API with the SHA256
cipher handle to calculate the message digest.
</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</sect2>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="Development"><title>Developing Cipher Algorithms</title>
@@ -1072,602 +808,6 @@ kernel crypto API | Caller
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="User"><title>User Space Interface</title>
<sect1><title>Introduction</title>
<para>
The concepts of the kernel crypto API visible to kernel space is fully
applicable to the user space interface as well. Therefore, the kernel
crypto API high level discussion for the in-kernel use cases applies
here as well.
</para>
<para>
The major difference, however, is that user space can only act as a
consumer and never as a provider of a transformation or cipher algorithm.
</para>
<para>
The following covers the user space interface exported by the kernel
crypto API. A working example of this description is libkcapi that
can be obtained from [1]. That library can be used by user space
applications that require cryptographic services from the kernel.
</para>
<para>
Some details of the in-kernel kernel crypto API aspects do not
apply to user space, however. This includes the difference between
synchronous and asynchronous invocations. The user space API call
is fully synchronous.
</para>
<para>
[1] http://www.chronox.de/libkcapi.html
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>User Space API General Remarks</title>
<para>
The kernel crypto API is accessible from user space. Currently,
the following ciphers are accessible:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>Message digest including keyed message digest (HMAC, CMAC)</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Symmetric ciphers</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>AEAD ciphers</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Random Number Generators</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
The interface is provided via socket type using the type AF_ALG.
In addition, the setsockopt option type is SOL_ALG. In case the
user space header files do not export these flags yet, use the
following macros:
</para>
<programlisting>
#ifndef AF_ALG
#define AF_ALG 38
#endif
#ifndef SOL_ALG
#define SOL_ALG 279
#endif
</programlisting>
<para>
A cipher is accessed with the same name as done for the in-kernel
API calls. This includes the generic vs. unique naming schema for
ciphers as well as the enforcement of priorities for generic names.
</para>
<para>
To interact with the kernel crypto API, a socket must be
created by the user space application. User space invokes the cipher
operation with the send()/write() system call family. The result of the
cipher operation is obtained with the read()/recv() system call family.
</para>
<para>
The following API calls assume that the socket descriptor
is already opened by the user space application and discusses only
the kernel crypto API specific invocations.
</para>
<para>
To initialize the socket interface, the following sequence has to
be performed by the consumer:
</para>
<orderedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
Create a socket of type AF_ALG with the struct sockaddr_alg
parameter specified below for the different cipher types.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
Invoke bind with the socket descriptor
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
Invoke accept with the socket descriptor. The accept system call
returns a new file descriptor that is to be used to interact with
the particular cipher instance. When invoking send/write or recv/read
system calls to send data to the kernel or obtain data from the
kernel, the file descriptor returned by accept must be used.
</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>In-place Cipher operation</title>
<para>
Just like the in-kernel operation of the kernel crypto API, the user
space interface allows the cipher operation in-place. That means that
the input buffer used for the send/write system call and the output
buffer used by the read/recv system call may be one and the same.
This is of particular interest for symmetric cipher operations where a
copying of the output data to its final destination can be avoided.
</para>
<para>
If a consumer on the other hand wants to maintain the plaintext and
the ciphertext in different memory locations, all a consumer needs
to do is to provide different memory pointers for the encryption and
decryption operation.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Message Digest API</title>
<para>
The message digest type to be used for the cipher operation is
selected when invoking the bind syscall. bind requires the caller
to provide a filled struct sockaddr data structure. This data
structure must be filled as follows:
</para>
<programlisting>
struct sockaddr_alg sa = {
.salg_family = AF_ALG,
.salg_type = "hash", /* this selects the hash logic in the kernel */
.salg_name = "sha1" /* this is the cipher name */
};
</programlisting>
<para>
The salg_type value "hash" applies to message digests and keyed
message digests. Though, a keyed message digest is referenced by
the appropriate salg_name. Please see below for the setsockopt
interface that explains how the key can be set for a keyed message
digest.
</para>
<para>
Using the send() system call, the application provides the data that
should be processed with the message digest. The send system call
allows the following flags to be specified:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
MSG_MORE: If this flag is set, the send system call acts like a
message digest update function where the final hash is not
yet calculated. If the flag is not set, the send system call
calculates the final message digest immediately.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
With the recv() system call, the application can read the message
digest from the kernel crypto API. If the buffer is too small for the
message digest, the flag MSG_TRUNC is set by the kernel.
</para>
<para>
In order to set a message digest key, the calling application must use
the setsockopt() option of ALG_SET_KEY. If the key is not set the HMAC
operation is performed without the initial HMAC state change caused by
the key.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Symmetric Cipher API</title>
<para>
The operation is very similar to the message digest discussion.
During initialization, the struct sockaddr data structure must be
filled as follows:
</para>
<programlisting>
struct sockaddr_alg sa = {
.salg_family = AF_ALG,
.salg_type = "skcipher", /* this selects the symmetric cipher */
.salg_name = "cbc(aes)" /* this is the cipher name */
};
</programlisting>
<para>
Before data can be sent to the kernel using the write/send system
call family, the consumer must set the key. The key setting is
described with the setsockopt invocation below.
</para>
<para>
Using the sendmsg() system call, the application provides the data that should be processed for encryption or decryption. In addition, the IV is
specified with the data structure provided by the sendmsg() system call.
</para>
<para>
The sendmsg system call parameter of struct msghdr is embedded into the
struct cmsghdr data structure. See recv(2) and cmsg(3) for more
information on how the cmsghdr data structure is used together with the
send/recv system call family. That cmsghdr data structure holds the
following information specified with a separate header instances:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
specification of the cipher operation type with one of these flags:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>ALG_OP_ENCRYPT - encryption of data</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>ALG_OP_DECRYPT - decryption of data</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
specification of the IV information marked with the flag ALG_SET_IV
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
The send system call family allows the following flag to be specified:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
MSG_MORE: If this flag is set, the send system call acts like a
cipher update function where more input data is expected
with a subsequent invocation of the send system call.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
Note: The kernel reports -EINVAL for any unexpected data. The caller
must make sure that all data matches the constraints given in
/proc/crypto for the selected cipher.
</para>
<para>
With the recv() system call, the application can read the result of
the cipher operation from the kernel crypto API. The output buffer
must be at least as large as to hold all blocks of the encrypted or
decrypted data. If the output data size is smaller, only as many
blocks are returned that fit into that output buffer size.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>AEAD Cipher API</title>
<para>
The operation is very similar to the symmetric cipher discussion.
During initialization, the struct sockaddr data structure must be
filled as follows:
</para>
<programlisting>
struct sockaddr_alg sa = {
.salg_family = AF_ALG,
.salg_type = "aead", /* this selects the symmetric cipher */
.salg_name = "gcm(aes)" /* this is the cipher name */
};
</programlisting>
<para>
Before data can be sent to the kernel using the write/send system
call family, the consumer must set the key. The key setting is
described with the setsockopt invocation below.
</para>
<para>
In addition, before data can be sent to the kernel using the
write/send system call family, the consumer must set the authentication
tag size. To set the authentication tag size, the caller must use the
setsockopt invocation described below.
</para>
<para>
Using the sendmsg() system call, the application provides the data that should be processed for encryption or decryption. In addition, the IV is
specified with the data structure provided by the sendmsg() system call.
</para>
<para>
The sendmsg system call parameter of struct msghdr is embedded into the
struct cmsghdr data structure. See recv(2) and cmsg(3) for more
information on how the cmsghdr data structure is used together with the
send/recv system call family. That cmsghdr data structure holds the
following information specified with a separate header instances:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
specification of the cipher operation type with one of these flags:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>ALG_OP_ENCRYPT - encryption of data</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>ALG_OP_DECRYPT - decryption of data</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
specification of the IV information marked with the flag ALG_SET_IV
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
specification of the associated authentication data (AAD) with the
flag ALG_SET_AEAD_ASSOCLEN. The AAD is sent to the kernel together
with the plaintext / ciphertext. See below for the memory structure.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
The send system call family allows the following flag to be specified:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
MSG_MORE: If this flag is set, the send system call acts like a
cipher update function where more input data is expected
with a subsequent invocation of the send system call.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
Note: The kernel reports -EINVAL for any unexpected data. The caller
must make sure that all data matches the constraints given in
/proc/crypto for the selected cipher.
</para>
<para>
With the recv() system call, the application can read the result of
the cipher operation from the kernel crypto API. The output buffer
must be at least as large as defined with the memory structure below.
If the output data size is smaller, the cipher operation is not performed.
</para>
<para>
The authenticated decryption operation may indicate an integrity error.
Such breach in integrity is marked with the -EBADMSG error code.
</para>
<sect2><title>AEAD Memory Structure</title>
<para>
The AEAD cipher operates with the following information that
is communicated between user and kernel space as one data stream:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>plaintext or ciphertext</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>associated authentication data (AAD)</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>authentication tag</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
The sizes of the AAD and the authentication tag are provided with
the sendmsg and setsockopt calls (see there). As the kernel knows
the size of the entire data stream, the kernel is now able to
calculate the right offsets of the data components in the data
stream.
</para>
<para>
The user space caller must arrange the aforementioned information
in the following order:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
AEAD encryption input: AAD || plaintext
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
AEAD decryption input: AAD || ciphertext || authentication tag
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para>
The output buffer the user space caller provides must be at least as
large to hold the following data:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
AEAD encryption output: ciphertext || authentication tag
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
AEAD decryption output: plaintext
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Random Number Generator API</title>
<para>
Again, the operation is very similar to the other APIs.
During initialization, the struct sockaddr data structure must be
filled as follows:
</para>
<programlisting>
struct sockaddr_alg sa = {
.salg_family = AF_ALG,
.salg_type = "rng", /* this selects the symmetric cipher */
.salg_name = "drbg_nopr_sha256" /* this is the cipher name */
};
</programlisting>
<para>
Depending on the RNG type, the RNG must be seeded. The seed is provided
using the setsockopt interface to set the key. For example, the
ansi_cprng requires a seed. The DRBGs do not require a seed, but
may be seeded.
</para>
<para>
Using the read()/recvmsg() system calls, random numbers can be obtained.
The kernel generates at most 128 bytes in one call. If user space
requires more data, multiple calls to read()/recvmsg() must be made.
</para>
<para>
WARNING: The user space caller may invoke the initially mentioned
accept system call multiple times. In this case, the returned file
descriptors have the same state.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Zero-Copy Interface</title>
<para>
In addition to the send/write/read/recv system call familty, the AF_ALG
interface can be accessed with the zero-copy interface of splice/vmsplice.
As the name indicates, the kernel tries to avoid a copy operation into
kernel space.
</para>
<para>
The zero-copy operation requires data to be aligned at the page boundary.
Non-aligned data can be used as well, but may require more operations of
the kernel which would defeat the speed gains obtained from the zero-copy
interface.
</para>
<para>
The system-interent limit for the size of one zero-copy operation is
16 pages. If more data is to be sent to AF_ALG, user space must slice
the input into segments with a maximum size of 16 pages.
</para>
<para>
Zero-copy can be used with the following code example (a complete working
example is provided with libkcapi):
</para>
<programlisting>
int pipes[2];
pipe(pipes);
/* input data in iov */
vmsplice(pipes[1], iov, iovlen, SPLICE_F_GIFT);
/* opfd is the file descriptor returned from accept() system call */
splice(pipes[0], NULL, opfd, NULL, ret, 0);
read(opfd, out, outlen);
</programlisting>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Setsockopt Interface</title>
<para>
In addition to the read/recv and send/write system call handling
to send and retrieve data subject to the cipher operation, a consumer
also needs to set the additional information for the cipher operation.
This additional information is set using the setsockopt system call
that must be invoked with the file descriptor of the open cipher
(i.e. the file descriptor returned by the accept system call).
</para>
<para>
Each setsockopt invocation must use the level SOL_ALG.
</para>
<para>
The setsockopt interface allows setting the following data using
the mentioned optname:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
ALG_SET_KEY -- Setting the key. Key setting is applicable to:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>the skcipher cipher type (symmetric ciphers)</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>the hash cipher type (keyed message digests)</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>the AEAD cipher type</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>the RNG cipher type to provide the seed</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
ALG_SET_AEAD_AUTHSIZE -- Setting the authentication tag size
for AEAD ciphers. For a encryption operation, the authentication
tag of the given size will be generated. For a decryption operation,
the provided ciphertext is assumed to contain an authentication tag
of the given size (see section about AEAD memory layout below).
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>User space API example</title>
<para>
Please see [1] for libkcapi which provides an easy-to-use wrapper
around the aforementioned Netlink kernel interface. [1] also contains
a test application that invokes all libkcapi API calls.
</para>
<para>
[1] http://www.chronox.de/libkcapi.html
</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="API"><title>Programming Interface</title>
<sect1><title>Block Cipher Context Data Structures</title>
!Pinclude/linux/crypto.h Block Cipher Context Data Structures

View File

@@ -1293,7 +1293,7 @@ int max_width, max_height;</synopsis>
</para>
<para>
If a page flip can be successfully scheduled the driver must set the
<code>drm_crtc-&gt;fb</code> field to the new framebuffer pointed to
<code>drm_crtc-&lt;fb</code> field to the new framebuffer pointed to
by <code>fb</code>. This is important so that the reference counting
on framebuffers stays balanced.
</para>
@@ -3979,11 +3979,6 @@ int num_ioctls;</synopsis>
!Fdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/i915_irq.c intel_runtime_pm_disable_interrupts
!Fdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/i915_irq.c intel_runtime_pm_enable_interrupts
</sect2>
<sect2>
<title>Intel GVT-g Guest Support(vGPU)</title>
!Pdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/i915_vgpu.c Intel GVT-g guest support
!Idrivers/gpu/drm/i915/i915_vgpu.c
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>Display Hardware Handling</title>
@@ -4051,17 +4046,6 @@ int num_ioctls;</synopsis>
<title>Frame Buffer Compression (FBC)</title>
!Pdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_fbc.c Frame Buffer Compression (FBC)
!Idrivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_fbc.c
</sect2>
<sect2>
<title>Display Refresh Rate Switching (DRRS)</title>
!Pdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_dp.c Display Refresh Rate Switching (DRRS)
!Fdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_dp.c intel_dp_set_drrs_state
!Fdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_dp.c intel_edp_drrs_enable
!Fdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_dp.c intel_edp_drrs_disable
!Fdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_dp.c intel_edp_drrs_invalidate
!Fdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_dp.c intel_edp_drrs_flush
!Fdrivers/gpu/drm/i915/intel_dp.c intel_dp_drrs_init
</sect2>
<sect2>
<title>DPIO</title>
@@ -4184,7 +4168,7 @@ int num_ioctls;</synopsis>
<sect2>
<title>Buffer Object Eviction</title>
<para>
This section documents the interface functions for evicting buffer
This section documents the interface function for evicting buffer
objects to make space available in the virtual gpu address spaces.
Note that this is mostly orthogonal to shrinking buffer objects
caches, which has the goal to make main memory (shared with the gpu
@@ -4192,17 +4176,6 @@ int num_ioctls;</synopsis>
</para>
!Idrivers/gpu/drm/i915/i915_gem_evict.c
</sect2>
<sect2>
<title>Buffer Object Memory Shrinking</title>
<para>
This section documents the interface function for shrinking memory
usage of buffer object caches. Shrinking is used to make main memory
available. Note that this is mostly orthogonal to evicting buffer
objects, which has the goal to make space in gpu virtual address
spaces.
</para>
!Idrivers/gpu/drm/i915/i915_gem_shrinker.c
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1>

View File

@@ -1,13 +1,14 @@
<bibliography>
<title>References</title>
<biblioentry id="cea608">
<abbrev>CEA&nbsp;608-E</abbrev>
<biblioentry id="eia608">
<abbrev>EIA&nbsp;608-B</abbrev>
<authorgroup>
<corpauthor>Consumer Electronics Association (<ulink
url="http://www.ce.org">http://www.ce.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
<corpauthor>Electronic Industries Alliance (<ulink
url="http://www.eia.org">http://www.eia.org</ulink>)</corpauthor>
</authorgroup>
<title>CEA-608-E R-2014 "Line 21 Data Services"</title>
<title>EIA 608-B "Recommended Practice for Line 21 Data
Service"</title>
</biblioentry>
<biblioentry id="en300294">

View File

@@ -2491,7 +2491,7 @@ that used it. It was originally scheduled for removal in 2.6.35.
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Added <constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_RANGE</constant> control event
changes flag. See <xref linkend="ctrl-changes-flags"/>.</para>
changes flag. See <xref linkend="changes-flags"/>.</para>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</section>

View File

@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ ETS&nbsp;300&nbsp;231, lsb first transmitted.</entry>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_SLICED_CAPTION_525</constant></entry>
<entry>0x1000</entry>
<entry><xref linkend="cea608" /></entry>
<entry><xref linkend="eia608" /></entry>
<entry>NTSC line 21, 284 (second field 21)</entry>
<entry>Two bytes in transmission order, including parity
bit, lsb first transmitted.</entry>

View File

@@ -143,28 +143,86 @@
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry>struct</entry>
<entry><structfield>dev</structfield></entry>
<entry><structfield>v4l</structfield></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>Valid for (sub-)devices that create a single device node.</entry>
<entry>Valid for V4L sub-devices and nodes only.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>major</structfield></entry>
<entry>Device node major number.</entry>
<entry>V4L device node major number. For V4L sub-devices with no
device node, set by the driver to 0.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>minor</structfield></entry>
<entry>Device node minor number.</entry>
<entry>V4L device node minor number. For V4L sub-devices with no
device node, set by the driver to 0.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry>struct</entry>
<entry><structfield>fb</structfield></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>Valid for frame buffer nodes only.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>major</structfield></entry>
<entry>Frame buffer device node major number.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>minor</structfield></entry>
<entry>Frame buffer device node minor number.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry>struct</entry>
<entry><structfield>alsa</structfield></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>Valid for ALSA devices only.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>card</structfield></entry>
<entry>ALSA card number</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>device</structfield></entry>
<entry>ALSA device number</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>subdevice</structfield></entry>
<entry>ALSA sub-device number</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry>int</entry>
<entry><structfield>dvb</structfield></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>DVB card number</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry></entry>
<entry>__u8</entry>
<entry><structfield>raw</structfield>[184]</entry>
<entry><structfield>raw</structfield>[180]</entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
</row>
@@ -195,24 +253,8 @@
<entry>ALSA card</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>MEDIA_ENT_T_DEVNODE_DVB_FE</constant></entry>
<entry>DVB frontend devnode</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>MEDIA_ENT_T_DEVNODE_DVB_DEMUX</constant></entry>
<entry>DVB demux devnode</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>MEDIA_ENT_T_DEVNODE_DVB_DVR</constant></entry>
<entry>DVB DVR devnode</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>MEDIA_ENT_T_DEVNODE_DVB_CA</constant></entry>
<entry>DVB CAM devnode</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>MEDIA_ENT_T_DEVNODE_DVB_NET</constant></entry>
<entry>DVB network devnode</entry>
<entry><constant>MEDIA_ENT_T_DEVNODE_DVB</constant></entry>
<entry>DVB card</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>MEDIA_ENT_T_V4L2_SUBDEV</constant></entry>
@@ -240,10 +282,6 @@
it in some digital video standard, with appropriate embedded timing
signals.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>MEDIA_ENT_T_V4L2_SUBDEV_TUNER</constant></entry>
<entry>TV and/or radio tuner</entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>

View File

@@ -303,6 +303,45 @@ for a pixel lie next to each other in memory.</para>
<entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
</row>
<row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR666">
<entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR666</constant></entry>
<entry>'BGRH'</entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry></entry>
</row>
<row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR24">
<entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR24</constant></entry>
<entry>'BGR3'</entry>
@@ -365,46 +404,6 @@ for a pixel lie next to each other in memory.</para>
<entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
</row>
<row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR666">
<entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR666</constant></entry>
<entry>'BGRH'</entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
<entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
<entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>5</subscript></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry>
<entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
<entry>-</entry>
</row>
<row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-ABGR32">
<entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_ABGR32</constant></entry>
<entry>'AR24'</entry>

View File

@@ -38,10 +38,10 @@ columns and rows.</para>
</row>
<row>
<entry>start&nbsp;+&nbsp;4:</entry>
<entry>B<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
<entry>G<subscript>11</subscript></entry>
<entry>B<subscript>12</subscript></entry>
<entry>G<subscript>13</subscript></entry>
<entry>R<subscript>10</subscript></entry>
<entry>B<subscript>11</subscript></entry>
<entry>R<subscript>12</subscript></entry>
<entry>B<subscript>13</subscript></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>start&nbsp;+&nbsp;8:</entry>
@@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ columns and rows.</para>
</row>
<row>
<entry>start&nbsp;+&nbsp;12:</entry>
<entry>B<subscript>30</subscript></entry>
<entry>G<subscript>31</subscript></entry>
<entry>B<subscript>32</subscript></entry>
<entry>G<subscript>33</subscript></entry>
<entry>R<subscript>30</subscript></entry>
<entry>B<subscript>31</subscript></entry>
<entry>R<subscript>32</subscript></entry>
<entry>B<subscript>33</subscript></entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>

View File

@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
<title>Byte Order.</title>
<para>Each cell is one byte.
<informaltable frame="topbot" colsep="1" rowsep="1">
<tgroup cols="5" align="center">
<tgroup cols="5" align="center" border="1">
<colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" />
<tbody valign="top">
<row>

View File

@@ -29,12 +29,12 @@ and Cr planes have half as many pad bytes after their rows. In other
words, two Cx rows (including padding) is exactly as long as one Y row
(including padding).</para>
<para><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUV420M</constant> is intended to be
<para><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_NV12M</constant> is intended to be
used only in drivers and applications that support the multi-planar API,
described in <xref linkend="planar-apis"/>. </para>
<example>
<title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUV420M</constant> 4 &times; 4
<title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YVU420M</constant> 4 &times; 4
pixel image</title>
<formalpara>

View File

@@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ padding bytes after the last line of an image cross a system page
boundary. Input devices may write padding bytes, the value is
undefined. Output devices ignore the contents of padding
bytes.</para><para>When the image format is planar the
<structfield>bytesperline</structfield> value applies to the first
<structfield>bytesperline</structfield> value applies to the largest
plane and is divided by the same factor as the
<structfield>width</structfield> field for the other planes. For
<structfield>width</structfield> field for any smaller planes. For
example the Cb and Cr planes of a YUV 4:2:0 image have half as many
padding bytes following each line as the Y plane. To avoid ambiguities
drivers must return a <structfield>bytesperline</structfield> value
@@ -182,14 +182,14 @@ see <xref linkend="colorspaces" />.</entry>
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry>__u16</entry>
<entry><structfield>bytesperline</structfield></entry>
<entry>Distance in bytes between the leftmost pixels in two adjacent
lines. See &v4l2-pix-format;.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>__u16</entry>
<entry><structfield>reserved[6]</structfield></entry>
<entry><structfield>reserved[7]</structfield></entry>
<entry>Reserved for future extensions. Should be zeroed by the
application.</entry>
</row>
@@ -483,8 +483,8 @@ is the Y'CbCr encoding identifier (&v4l2-ycbcr-encoding;) to specify non-standar
Y'CbCr encodings and the third is the quantization identifier (&v4l2-quantization;)
to specify non-standard quantization methods. Most of the time only the colorspace
field of &v4l2-pix-format; or &v4l2-pix-format-mplane; needs to be filled in. Note
that the default R'G'B' quantization is full range for all colorspaces except for
BT.2020 which uses limited range R'G'B' quantization.</para>
that the default R'G'B' quantization is always full range for all colorspaces,
so this won't be mentioned explicitly for each colorspace description.</para>
<table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-colorspace">
<title>V4L2 Colorspaces</title>
@@ -598,8 +598,7 @@ BT.2020 which uses limited range R'G'B' quantization.</para>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_QUANTIZATION_DEFAULT</constant></entry>
<entry>Use the default quantization encoding as defined by the colorspace.
This is always full range for R'G'B' (except for the BT.2020 colorspace) and usually
limited range for Y'CbCr.</entry>
This is always full range for R'G'B' and usually limited range for Y'CbCr.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_QUANTIZATION_FULL_RANGE</constant></entry>
@@ -621,8 +620,8 @@ is mapped to [16&hellip;235]. Cb and Cr are mapped from [-0.5&hellip;0.5] to [16
<section>
<title>Detailed Colorspace Descriptions</title>
<section id="col-smpte-170m">
<title>Colorspace SMPTE 170M (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE170M</constant>)</title>
<section>
<title id="col-smpte-170m">Colorspace SMPTE 170M (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE170M</constant>)</title>
<para>The <xref linkend="smpte170m" /> standard defines the colorspace used by NTSC and PAL and by SDTV
in general. The default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant>.
The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and
@@ -667,7 +666,8 @@ as the SMPTE C set, so this colorspace is sometimes called SMPTE C as well.</par
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
<term>The transfer function defined for SMPTE 170M is the same as the
one defined in Rec. 709.</term>
one defined in Rec. 709. Normally L is in the range [0&hellip;1], but for the extended
gamut xvYCC encoding values outside that range are allowed.</term>
<listitem>
<para>L' = -1.099(-L)<superscript>0.45</superscript>&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.099&nbsp;for&nbsp;L&nbsp;&le;&nbsp;-0.018</para>
<para>L' = 4.5L&nbsp;for&nbsp;-0.018&nbsp;&lt;&nbsp;L&nbsp;&lt;&nbsp;0.018</para>
@@ -702,10 +702,29 @@ defined in the <xref linkend="itu601" /> standard and this colorspace is sometim
though BT.601 does not mention any color primaries.</para>
<para>The default quantization is limited range, but full range is possible although
rarely seen.</para>
<para>The <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant> encoding as described above is the
default for this colorspace, but it can be overridden with <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_709</constant>,
in which case the Rec. 709 Y'CbCr encoding is used.</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
<term>The xvYCC 601 encoding (<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV601</constant>, <xref linkend="xvycc" />) is similar
to the BT.601 encoding, but it allows for R', G' and B' values that are outside the range
[0&hellip;1]. The resulting Y', Cb and Cr values are scaled and offset:</term>
<listitem>
<para>Y'&nbsp;=&nbsp;(219&nbsp;/&nbsp;255)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(0.299R'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.587G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.114B')&nbsp;+&nbsp;(16&nbsp;/&nbsp;255)</para>
<para>Cb&nbsp;=&nbsp;(224&nbsp;/&nbsp;255)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(-0.169R'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.331G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.5B')</para>
<para>Cr&nbsp;=&nbsp;(224&nbsp;/&nbsp;255)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(0.5R'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.419G'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.081B')</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
<para>Y' is clamped to the range [0&hellip;1] and Cb and Cr are clamped
to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The non-standard xvYCC 709 encoding can also be used by selecting
<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV709</constant>. The xvYCC encodings always use full range
quantization.</para>
</section>
<section id="col-rec709">
<title>Colorspace Rec. 709 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_REC709</constant>)</title>
<section>
<title id="col-rec709">Colorspace Rec. 709 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_REC709</constant>)</title>
<para>The <xref linkend="itu709" /> standard defines the colorspace used by HDTV in general. The default
Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_709</constant>. The default Y'CbCr quantization is
limited range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and the white reference are:</para>
@@ -784,39 +803,26 @@ rarely seen.</para>
<para>The <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_709</constant> encoding described above is the default
for this colorspace, but it can be overridden with <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant>, in which
case the BT.601 Y'CbCr encoding is used.</para>
<para>Two additional extended gamut Y'CbCr encodings are also possible with this colorspace:</para>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
<term>The xvYCC 709 encoding (<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV709</constant>, <xref linkend="xvycc" />)
is similar to the Rec. 709 encoding, but it allows for R', G' and B' values that are outside the range
[0&hellip;1]. The resulting Y', Cb and Cr values are scaled and offset:</term>
<listitem>
<para>Y'&nbsp;=&nbsp;(219&nbsp;/&nbsp;256)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(0.2126R'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.7152G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.0722B')&nbsp;+&nbsp;(16&nbsp;/&nbsp;256)</para>
<para>Cb&nbsp;=&nbsp;(224&nbsp;/&nbsp;256)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(-0.1146R'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.3854G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.5B')</para>
<para>Cr&nbsp;=&nbsp;(224&nbsp;/&nbsp;256)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(0.5R'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.4542G'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.0458B')</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
<variablelist>
<varlistentry>
<term>The xvYCC 601 encoding (<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV601</constant>, <xref linkend="xvycc" />) is similar
to the BT.601 encoding, but it allows for R', G' and B' values that are outside the range
[0&hellip;1]. The resulting Y', Cb and Cr values are scaled and offset:</term>
<listitem>
<para>Y'&nbsp;=&nbsp;(219&nbsp;/&nbsp;256)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(0.299R'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.587G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.114B')&nbsp;+&nbsp;(16&nbsp;/&nbsp;256)</para>
<para>Cb&nbsp;=&nbsp;(224&nbsp;/&nbsp;256)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(-0.169R'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.331G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.5B')</para>
<para>Cr&nbsp;=&nbsp;(224&nbsp;/&nbsp;256)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(0.5R'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.419G'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.081B')</para>
<para>Y'&nbsp;=&nbsp;(219&nbsp;/&nbsp;255)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(0.2126R'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.7152G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.0722B')&nbsp;+&nbsp;(16&nbsp;/&nbsp;255)</para>
<para>Cb&nbsp;=&nbsp;(224&nbsp;/&nbsp;255)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(-0.1146R'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.3854G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.5B')</para>
<para>Cr&nbsp;=&nbsp;(224&nbsp;/&nbsp;255)&nbsp;*&nbsp;(0.5R'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.4542G'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.0458B')</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
<para>Y' is clamped to the range [0&hellip;1] and Cb and Cr are clamped
to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The non-standard xvYCC 709 or xvYCC 601 encodings can be used by
selecting <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV709</constant> or <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV601</constant>.
The xvYCC encodings always use full range quantization.</para>
to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The non-standard xvYCC 601 encoding can also be used by
selecting <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV601</constant>. The xvYCC encodings always use full
range quantization.</para>
</section>
<section id="col-srgb">
<title>Colorspace sRGB (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SRGB</constant>)</title>
<section>
<title id="col-srgb">Colorspace sRGB (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SRGB</constant>)</title>
<para>The <xref linkend="srgb" /> standard defines the colorspace used by most webcams and computer graphics. The
default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_SYCC</constant>. The default Y'CbCr quantization
is full range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and the white reference are:</para>
@@ -892,8 +898,8 @@ encoding, it is not. The <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV601</constant> scales and of
values before quantization, but this encoding does not do that.</para>
</section>
<section id="col-adobergb">
<title>Colorspace Adobe RGB (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_ADOBERGB</constant>)</title>
<section>
<title id="col-adobergb">Colorspace Adobe RGB (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_ADOBERGB</constant>)</title>
<para>The <xref linkend="adobergb" /> standard defines the colorspace used by computer graphics
that use the AdobeRGB colorspace. This is also known as the <xref linkend="oprgb" /> standard.
The default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant>. The default Y'CbCr
@@ -964,12 +970,12 @@ clamped to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. This transform is identical to one defin
SMPTE 170M/BT.601. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range.</para>
</section>
<section id="col-bt2020">
<title>Colorspace BT.2020 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_BT2020</constant>)</title>
<section>
<title id="col-bt2020">Colorspace BT.2020 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_BT2020</constant>)</title>
<para>The <xref linkend="itu2020" /> standard defines the colorspace used by Ultra-high definition
television (UHDTV). The default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_BT2020</constant>.
The default R'G'B' quantization is limited range (!), and so is the default Y'CbCr quantization.
The chromaticities of the primary colors and the white reference are:</para>
The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and
the white reference are:</para>
<table frame="none">
<title>BT.2020 Chromaticities</title>
<tgroup cols="3" align="left">
@@ -1026,7 +1032,7 @@ The chromaticities of the primary colors and the white reference are:</para>
<term>The luminance (Y') and color difference (Cb and Cr) are obtained with the
following <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_BT2020</constant> encoding:</term>
<listitem>
<para>Y'&nbsp;=&nbsp;0.2627R'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.6780G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.0593B'</para>
<para>Y'&nbsp;=&nbsp;0.2627R'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.6789G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.0593B'</para>
<para>Cb&nbsp;=&nbsp;-0.1396R'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.3604G'&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.5B'</para>
<para>Cr&nbsp;=&nbsp;0.5R'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.4598G'&nbsp;-&nbsp;0.0402B'</para>
</listitem>
@@ -1040,7 +1046,7 @@ clamped to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range
<varlistentry>
<term>Luma:</term>
<listitem>
<para>Yc'&nbsp;=&nbsp;(0.2627R&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.6780G&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.0593B)'</para>
<para>Yc'&nbsp;=&nbsp;(0.2627R&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.6789G&nbsp;+&nbsp;0.0593B)'</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
@@ -1048,7 +1054,7 @@ clamped to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range
<varlistentry>
<term>B'&nbsp;-&nbsp;Yc'&nbsp;&le;&nbsp;0:</term>
<listitem>
<para>Cbc&nbsp;=&nbsp;(B'&nbsp;-&nbsp;Yc')&nbsp;/&nbsp;1.9404</para>
<para>Cbc&nbsp;=&nbsp;(B'&nbsp;-&nbsp;Y')&nbsp;/&nbsp;1.9404</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
@@ -1056,7 +1062,7 @@ clamped to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range
<varlistentry>
<term>B'&nbsp;-&nbsp;Yc'&nbsp;&gt;&nbsp;0:</term>
<listitem>
<para>Cbc&nbsp;=&nbsp;(B'&nbsp;-&nbsp;Yc')&nbsp;/&nbsp;1.5816</para>
<para>Cbc&nbsp;=&nbsp;(B'&nbsp;-&nbsp;Y')&nbsp;/&nbsp;1.5816</para>
</listitem>
</varlistentry>
</variablelist>
@@ -1080,8 +1086,8 @@ clamped to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range
clamped to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The Yc'CbcCrc quantization is limited range.</para>
</section>
<section id="col-smpte-240m">
<title>Colorspace SMPTE 240M (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE240M</constant>)</title>
<section>
<title id="col-smpte-240m">Colorspace SMPTE 240M (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE240M</constant>)</title>
<para>The <xref linkend="smpte240m" /> standard was an interim standard used during the early days of HDTV (1988-1998).
It has been superseded by Rec. 709. The default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_SMPTE240M</constant>.
The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and the
@@ -1153,8 +1159,8 @@ following <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_SMPTE240M</constant> encoding:</term>
clamped to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range.</para>
</section>
<section id="col-sysm">
<title>Colorspace NTSC 1953 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_470_SYSTEM_M</constant>)</title>
<section>
<title id="col-sysm">Colorspace NTSC 1953 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_470_SYSTEM_M</constant>)</title>
<para>This standard defines the colorspace used by NTSC in 1953. In practice this
colorspace is obsolete and SMPTE 170M should be used instead. The default Y'CbCr encoding
is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant>. The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range.
@@ -1231,8 +1237,8 @@ clamped to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range
This transform is identical to one defined in SMPTE 170M/BT.601.</para>
</section>
<section id="col-sysbg">
<title>Colorspace EBU Tech. 3213 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_470_SYSTEM_BG</constant>)</title>
<section>
<title id="col-sysbg">Colorspace EBU Tech. 3213 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_470_SYSTEM_BG</constant>)</title>
<para>The <xref linkend="tech3213" /> standard defines the colorspace used by PAL/SECAM in 1975. In practice this
colorspace is obsolete and SMPTE 170M should be used instead. The default Y'CbCr encoding
is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant>. The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range.
@@ -1305,8 +1311,8 @@ clamped to the range [-0.5&hellip;0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range
This transform is identical to one defined in SMPTE 170M/BT.601.</para>
</section>
<section id="col-jpeg">
<title>Colorspace JPEG (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_JPEG</constant>)</title>
<section>
<title id="col-jpeg">Colorspace JPEG (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_JPEG</constant>)</title>
<para>This colorspace defines the colorspace used by most (Motion-)JPEG formats. The chromaticities
of the primary colors and the white reference are identical to sRGB. The Y'CbCr encoding is
<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant> with full range quantization where

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

View File

@@ -136,7 +136,6 @@ Remote Controller chapter.</contrib>
<year>2012</year>
<year>2013</year>
<year>2014</year>
<year>2015</year>
<holder>Bill Dirks, Michael H. Schimek, Hans Verkuil, Martin
Rubli, Andy Walls, Muralidharan Karicheri, Mauro Carvalho Chehab,
Pawel Osciak</holder>
@@ -152,14 +151,6 @@ structs, ioctls) must be noted in more detail in the history chapter
(compat.xml), along with the possible impact on existing drivers and
applications. -->
<revision>
<revnumber>3.21</revnumber>
<date>2015-02-13</date>
<authorinitials>mcc</authorinitials>
<revremark>Fix documentation for media controller device nodes and add support for DVB device nodes.
Add support for Tuner sub-device.
</revremark>
</revision>
<revision>
<revnumber>3.19</revnumber>
<date>2014-12-05</date>

View File

@@ -59,11 +59,6 @@ constant except when switching the video standard. Remember this
switch can occur implicit when switching the video input or
output.</para>
<para>Do not use the multiplanar buffer types. Use <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>
instead of <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE</constant>
and use <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant> instead of
<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE</constant>.</para>
<para>This ioctl must be implemented for video capture or output devices that
support cropping and/or scaling and/or have non-square pixels, and for overlay devices.</para>
@@ -78,7 +73,9 @@ support cropping and/or scaling and/or have non-square pixels, and for overlay d
<entry>Type of the data stream, set by the application.
Only these types are valid here:
<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>,
<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant> and
<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE</constant>,
<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant>,
<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE</constant> and
<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OVERLAY</constant>. See <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</entry>
</row>
<row>

View File

@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>Type of the event, see <xref linkend="event-type" />.</entry>
<entry>Type of the event.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>union</entry>
@@ -154,113 +154,6 @@
</tgroup>
</table>
<table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="event-type">
<title>Event Types</title>
<tgroup cols="3">
&cs-def;
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_ALL</constant></entry>
<entry>0</entry>
<entry>All events. V4L2_EVENT_ALL is valid only for
VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT for unsubscribing all events at once.
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_VSYNC</constant></entry>
<entry>1</entry>
<entry>This event is triggered on the vertical sync.
This event has a &v4l2-event-vsync; associated with it.
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_EOS</constant></entry>
<entry>2</entry>
<entry>This event is triggered when the end of a stream is reached.
This is typically used with MPEG decoders to report to the application
when the last of the MPEG stream has been decoded.
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL</constant></entry>
<entry>3</entry>
<entry><para>This event requires that the <structfield>id</structfield>
matches the control ID from which you want to receive events.
This event is triggered if the control's value changes, if a
button control is pressed or if the control's flags change.
This event has a &v4l2-event-ctrl; associated with it. This struct
contains much of the same information as &v4l2-queryctrl; and
&v4l2-control;.</para>
<para>If the event is generated due to a call to &VIDIOC-S-CTRL; or
&VIDIOC-S-EXT-CTRLS;, then the event will <emphasis>not</emphasis> be sent to
the file handle that called the ioctl function. This prevents
nasty feedback loops. If you <emphasis>do</emphasis> want to get the
event, then set the <constant>V4L2_EVENT_SUB_FL_ALLOW_FEEDBACK</constant>
flag.
</para>
<para>This event type will ensure that no information is lost when
more events are raised than there is room internally. In that
case the &v4l2-event-ctrl; of the second-oldest event is kept,
but the <structfield>changes</structfield> field of the
second-oldest event is ORed with the <structfield>changes</structfield>
field of the oldest event.</para>
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC</constant></entry>
<entry>4</entry>
<entry>
<para>Triggered immediately when the reception of a
frame has begun. This event has a
&v4l2-event-frame-sync; associated with it.</para>
<para>If the hardware needs to be stopped in the case of a
buffer underrun it might not be able to generate this event.
In such cases the <structfield>frame_sequence</structfield>
field in &v4l2-event-frame-sync; will not be incremented. This
causes two consecutive frame sequence numbers to have n times
frame interval in between them.</para>
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_SOURCE_CHANGE</constant></entry>
<entry>5</entry>
<entry>
<para>This event is triggered when a source parameter change is
detected during runtime by the video device. It can be a
runtime resolution change triggered by a video decoder or the
format change happening on an input connector.
This event requires that the <structfield>id</structfield>
matches the input index (when used with a video device node)
or the pad index (when used with a subdevice node) from which
you want to receive events.</para>
<para>This event has a &v4l2-event-src-change; associated
with it. The <structfield>changes</structfield> bitfield denotes
what has changed for the subscribed pad. If multiple events
occurred before application could dequeue them, then the changes
will have the ORed value of all the events generated.</para>
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_MOTION_DET</constant></entry>
<entry>6</entry>
<entry>
<para>Triggered whenever the motion detection state for one or more of the regions
changes. This event has a &v4l2-event-motion-det; associated with it.</para>
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_PRIVATE_START</constant></entry>
<entry>0x08000000</entry>
<entry>Base event number for driver-private events.</entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event-vsync">
<title>struct <structname>v4l2_event_vsync</structname></title>
<tgroup cols="3">
@@ -284,7 +177,7 @@
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>changes</structfield></entry>
<entry></entry>
<entry>A bitmask that tells what has changed. See <xref linkend="ctrl-changes-flags" />.</entry>
<entry>A bitmask that tells what has changed. See <xref linkend="changes-flags" />.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -416,8 +309,8 @@
</tgroup>
</table>
<table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="ctrl-changes-flags">
<title>Control Changes</title>
<table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="changes-flags">
<title>Changes</title>
<tgroup cols="3">
&cs-def;
<tbody valign="top">
@@ -425,9 +318,9 @@
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_VALUE</constant></entry>
<entry>0x0001</entry>
<entry>This control event was triggered because the value of the control
changed. Special cases: Volatile controls do no generate this event;
If a control has the <constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_EXECUTE_ON_WRITE</constant>
flag set, then this event is sent as well, regardless its value.</entry>
changed. Special case: if a button control is pressed, then this
event is sent as well, even though there is not explicit value
associated with a button control.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_FLAGS</constant></entry>

View File

@@ -70,11 +70,6 @@ structure or returns the &EINVAL; if cropping is not supported.</para>
<constant>VIDIOC_S_CROP</constant> ioctl with a pointer to this
structure.</para>
<para>Do not use the multiplanar buffer types. Use <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>
instead of <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE</constant>
and use <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant> instead of
<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE</constant>.</para>
<para>The driver first adjusts the requested dimensions against
hardware limits, &ie; the bounds given by the capture/output window,
and it rounds to the closest possible values of horizontal and

View File

@@ -318,20 +318,10 @@ can't generate such frequencies, then the flag will also be cleared.
</row>
<row>
<entry>V4L2_DV_FL_HALF_LINE</entry>
<entry>Specific to interlaced formats: if set, then the vertical frontporch
of field 1 (aka the odd field) is really one half-line longer and the vertical backporch
of field 2 (aka the even field) is really one half-line shorter, so each field has exactly
the same number of half-lines. Whether half-lines can be detected or used depends on
the hardware.
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>V4L2_DV_FL_IS_CE_VIDEO</entry>
<entry>If set, then this is a Consumer Electronics (CE) video format.
Such formats differ from other formats (commonly called IT formats) in that if
R'G'B' encoding is used then by default the R'G'B' values use limited range
(i.e. 16-235) as opposed to full range (i.e. 0-255). All formats defined in CEA-861
except for the 640x480p59.94 format are CE formats.
<entry>Specific to interlaced formats: if set, then field 1 (aka the odd field)
is really one half-line longer and field 2 (aka the even field) is really one half-line
shorter, so each field has exactly the same number of half-lines. Whether half-lines can be
detected or used depends on the hardware.
</entry>
</row>
</tbody>

View File

@@ -240,9 +240,9 @@ where padding bytes after the last line of an image cross a system
page boundary. Capture devices may write padding bytes, the value is
undefined. Output devices ignore the contents of padding
bytes.</para><para>When the image format is planar the
<structfield>bytesperline</structfield> value applies to the first
<structfield>bytesperline</structfield> value applies to the largest
plane and is divided by the same factor as the
<structfield>width</structfield> field for the other planes. For
<structfield>width</structfield> field for any smaller planes. For
example the Cb and Cr planes of a YUV 4:2:0 image have half as many
padding bytes following each line as the Y plane. To avoid ambiguities
drivers must return a <structfield>bytesperline</structfield> value

View File

@@ -60,8 +60,8 @@
<para>To query the cropping (composing) rectangle set &v4l2-selection;
<structfield> type </structfield> field to the respective buffer type.
Do not use the multiplanar buffer types. Use <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>
instead of <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE</constant> and use
Do not use multiplanar buffers. Use <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE</constant>
instead of <constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_CAPTURE_MPLANE</constant>. Use
<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT</constant> instead of
<constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_MPLANE</constant>. The next step is
setting the value of &v4l2-selection; <structfield>target</structfield> field

View File

@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ ETS&nbsp;300&nbsp;231, lsb first transmitted.</entry>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_SLICED_CAPTION_525</constant></entry>
<entry>0x1000</entry>
<entry><xref linkend="cea608" /></entry>
<entry><xref linkend="eia608" /></entry>
<entry>NTSC line 21, 284 (second field 21)</entry>
<entry>Two bytes in transmission order, including parity
bit, lsb first transmitted.</entry>

View File

@@ -102,10 +102,10 @@ The bus_info must start with "PCI:" for PCI boards, "PCIe:" for PCI Express boar
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>version</structfield></entry>
<entry><para>Version number of the driver.</para>
<para>Starting with kernel 3.1, the version reported is provided by the
V4L2 subsystem following the kernel numbering scheme. However, it
may not always return the same version as the kernel if, for example,
a stable or distribution-modified kernel uses the V4L2 stack from a
<para>Starting on kernel 3.1, the version reported is provided per
V4L2 subsystem, following the same Kernel numberation scheme. However, it
should not always return the same version as the kernel, if, for example,
an stable or distribution-modified kernel uses the V4L2 stack from a
newer kernel.</para>
<para>The version number is formatted using the
<constant>KERNEL_VERSION()</constant> macro:</para></entry>

View File

@@ -600,9 +600,7 @@ writing a value will cause the device to carry out a given action
changes continuously. A typical example would be the current gain value if the device
is in auto-gain mode. In such a case the hardware calculates the gain value based on
the lighting conditions which can change over time. Note that setting a new value for
a volatile control will have no effect and no <constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL_CH_VALUE</constant>
will be sent, unless the <constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_EXECUTE_ON_WRITE</constant> flag
(see below) is also set. Otherwise the new value will just be ignored.</entry>
a volatile control will have no effect. The new value will just be ignored.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_HAS_PAYLOAD</constant></entry>
@@ -612,14 +610,6 @@ using one of the pointer fields of &v4l2-ext-control;. This flag is set for cont
that are an array, string, or have a compound type. In all cases you have to set a
pointer to memory containing the payload of the control.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_FLAG_EXECUTE_ON_WRITE</constant></entry>
<entry>0x0200</entry>
<entry>The value provided to the control will be propagated to the driver
even if remains constant. This is required when the control represents an action
on the hardware. For example: clearing an error flag or triggering the flash. All the
controls of the type <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BUTTON</constant> have this flag set.</entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>

View File

@@ -67,9 +67,9 @@
<para>To enumerate frame intervals applications initialize the
<structfield>index</structfield>, <structfield>pad</structfield>,
<structfield>which</structfield>, <structfield>code</structfield>,
<structfield>width</structfield> and <structfield>height</structfield>
fields of &v4l2-subdev-frame-interval-enum; and call the
<structfield>code</structfield>, <structfield>width</structfield> and
<structfield>height</structfield> fields of
&v4l2-subdev-frame-interval-enum; and call the
<constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_ENUM_FRAME_INTERVAL</constant> ioctl with a pointer
to this structure. Drivers fill the rest of the structure or return
an &EINVAL; if one of the input fields is invalid. All frame intervals are
@@ -123,12 +123,7 @@
</row>
<row>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>which</structfield></entry>
<entry>Frame intervals to be enumerated, from &v4l2-subdev-format-whence;.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[8]</entry>
<entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[9]</entry>
<entry>Reserved for future extensions. Applications and drivers must
set the array to zero.</entry>
</row>

View File

@@ -61,9 +61,9 @@
ioctl.</para>
<para>To enumerate frame sizes applications initialize the
<structfield>pad</structfield>, <structfield>which</structfield> ,
<structfield>code</structfield> and <structfield>index</structfield>
fields of the &v4l2-subdev-mbus-code-enum; and call the
<structfield>pad</structfield>, <structfield>code</structfield> and
<structfield>index</structfield> fields of the
&v4l2-subdev-mbus-code-enum; and call the
<constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_ENUM_FRAME_SIZE</constant> ioctl with a pointer to
the structure. Drivers fill the minimum and maximum frame sizes or return
an &EINVAL; if one of the input parameters is invalid.</para>
@@ -127,12 +127,7 @@
</row>
<row>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>which</structfield></entry>
<entry>Frame sizes to be enumerated, from &v4l2-subdev-format-whence;.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[8]</entry>
<entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[9]</entry>
<entry>Reserved for future extensions. Applications and drivers must
set the array to zero.</entry>
</row>

View File

@@ -56,8 +56,8 @@
</note>
<para>To enumerate media bus formats available at a given sub-device pad
applications initialize the <structfield>pad</structfield>, <structfield>which</structfield>
and <structfield>index</structfield> fields of &v4l2-subdev-mbus-code-enum; and
applications initialize the <structfield>pad</structfield> and
<structfield>index</structfield> fields of &v4l2-subdev-mbus-code-enum; and
call the <constant>VIDIOC_SUBDEV_ENUM_MBUS_CODE</constant> ioctl with a
pointer to this structure. Drivers fill the rest of the structure or return
an &EINVAL; if either the <structfield>pad</structfield> or
@@ -93,12 +93,7 @@
</row>
<row>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>which</structfield></entry>
<entry>Media bus format codes to be enumerated, from &v4l2-subdev-format-whence;.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[8]</entry>
<entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[9]</entry>
<entry>Reserved for future extensions. Applications and drivers must
set the array to zero.</entry>
</row>

View File

@@ -60,9 +60,7 @@
<row>
<entry>__u32</entry>
<entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
<entry>Type of the event, see <xref linkend="event-type" />. Note that
<constant>V4L2_EVENT_ALL</constant> can be used with VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT
for unsubscribing all events at once.</entry>
<entry>Type of the event.</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry>__u32</entry>
@@ -86,6 +84,113 @@ for unsubscribing all events at once.</entry>
</tgroup>
</table>
<table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="event-type">
<title>Event Types</title>
<tgroup cols="3">
&cs-def;
<tbody valign="top">
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_ALL</constant></entry>
<entry>0</entry>
<entry>All events. V4L2_EVENT_ALL is valid only for
VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT for unsubscribing all events at once.
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_VSYNC</constant></entry>
<entry>1</entry>
<entry>This event is triggered on the vertical sync.
This event has a &v4l2-event-vsync; associated with it.
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_EOS</constant></entry>
<entry>2</entry>
<entry>This event is triggered when the end of a stream is reached.
This is typically used with MPEG decoders to report to the application
when the last of the MPEG stream has been decoded.
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_CTRL</constant></entry>
<entry>3</entry>
<entry><para>This event requires that the <structfield>id</structfield>
matches the control ID from which you want to receive events.
This event is triggered if the control's value changes, if a
button control is pressed or if the control's flags change.
This event has a &v4l2-event-ctrl; associated with it. This struct
contains much of the same information as &v4l2-queryctrl; and
&v4l2-control;.</para>
<para>If the event is generated due to a call to &VIDIOC-S-CTRL; or
&VIDIOC-S-EXT-CTRLS;, then the event will <emphasis>not</emphasis> be sent to
the file handle that called the ioctl function. This prevents
nasty feedback loops. If you <emphasis>do</emphasis> want to get the
event, then set the <constant>V4L2_EVENT_SUB_FL_ALLOW_FEEDBACK</constant>
flag.
</para>
<para>This event type will ensure that no information is lost when
more events are raised than there is room internally. In that
case the &v4l2-event-ctrl; of the second-oldest event is kept,
but the <structfield>changes</structfield> field of the
second-oldest event is ORed with the <structfield>changes</structfield>
field of the oldest event.</para>
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_FRAME_SYNC</constant></entry>
<entry>4</entry>
<entry>
<para>Triggered immediately when the reception of a
frame has begun. This event has a
&v4l2-event-frame-sync; associated with it.</para>
<para>If the hardware needs to be stopped in the case of a
buffer underrun it might not be able to generate this event.
In such cases the <structfield>frame_sequence</structfield>
field in &v4l2-event-frame-sync; will not be incremented. This
causes two consecutive frame sequence numbers to have n times
frame interval in between them.</para>
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_SOURCE_CHANGE</constant></entry>
<entry>5</entry>
<entry>
<para>This event is triggered when a source parameter change is
detected during runtime by the video device. It can be a
runtime resolution change triggered by a video decoder or the
format change happening on an input connector.
This event requires that the <structfield>id</structfield>
matches the input index (when used with a video device node)
or the pad index (when used with a subdevice node) from which
you want to receive events.</para>
<para>This event has a &v4l2-event-src-change; associated
with it. The <structfield>changes</structfield> bitfield denotes
what has changed for the subscribed pad. If multiple events
occurred before application could dequeue them, then the changes
will have the ORed value of all the events generated.</para>
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_MOTION_DET</constant></entry>
<entry>6</entry>
<entry>
<para>Triggered whenever the motion detection state for one or more of the regions
changes. This event has a &v4l2-event-motion-det; associated with it.</para>
</entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_PRIVATE_START</constant></entry>
<entry>0x08000000</entry>
<entry>Base event number for driver-private events.</entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
</table>
<table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="event-flags">
<title>Event Flags</title>
<tgroup cols="3">

View File

@@ -218,16 +218,16 @@ The development process
Linux kernel development process currently consists of a few different
main kernel "branches" and lots of different subsystem-specific kernel
branches. These different branches are:
- main 4.x kernel tree
- 4.x.y -stable kernel tree
- 4.x -git kernel patches
- main 3.x kernel tree
- 3.x.y -stable kernel tree
- 3.x -git kernel patches
- subsystem specific kernel trees and patches
- the 4.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
- the 3.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
4.x kernel tree
3.x kernel tree
-----------------
4.x kernels are maintained by Linus Torvalds, and can be found on
kernel.org in the pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/ directory. Its development
3.x kernels are maintained by Linus Torvalds, and can be found on
kernel.org in the pub/linux/kernel/v3.x/ directory. Its development
process is as follows:
- As soon as a new kernel is released a two weeks window is open,
during this period of time maintainers can submit big diffs to
@@ -262,20 +262,20 @@ mailing list about kernel releases:
released according to perceived bug status, not according to a
preconceived timeline."
4.x.y -stable kernel tree
3.x.y -stable kernel tree
---------------------------
Kernels with 3-part versions are -stable kernels. They contain
relatively small and critical fixes for security problems or significant
regressions discovered in a given 4.x kernel.
regressions discovered in a given 3.x kernel.
This is the recommended branch for users who want the most recent stable
kernel and are not interested in helping test development/experimental
versions.
If no 4.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 4.x
If no 3.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 3.x
kernel is the current stable kernel.
4.x.y are maintained by the "stable" team <stable@vger.kernel.org>, and
3.x.y are maintained by the "stable" team <stable@vger.kernel.org>, and
are released as needs dictate. The normal release period is approximately
two weeks, but it can be longer if there are no pressing problems. A
security-related problem, instead, can cause a release to happen almost
@@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ The file Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt in the kernel tree
documents what kinds of changes are acceptable for the -stable tree, and
how the release process works.
4.x -git patches
3.x -git patches
------------------
These are daily snapshots of Linus' kernel tree which are managed in a
git repository (hence the name.) These patches are usually released
@@ -317,9 +317,9 @@ revisions to it, and maintainers can mark patches as under review,
accepted, or rejected. Most of these patchwork sites are listed at
http://patchwork.kernel.org/.
4.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
3.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
---------------------------------------------
Before updates from subsystem trees are merged into the mainline 4.x
Before updates from subsystem trees are merged into the mainline 3.x
tree, they need to be integration-tested. For this purpose, a special
testing repository exists into which virtually all subsystem trees are
pulled on an almost daily basis:

View File

@@ -505,10 +505,7 @@ at module load time (for a module) with:
The addresses are normal I2C addresses. The adapter is the string
name of the adapter, as shown in /sys/class/i2c-adapter/i2c-<n>/name.
It is *NOT* i2c-<n> itself. Also, the comparison is done ignoring
spaces, so if the name is "This is an I2C chip" you can say
adapter_name=ThisisanI2cchip. This is because it's hard to pass in
spaces in kernel parameters.
It is *NOT* i2c-<n> itself.
The debug flags are bit flags for each BMC found, they are:
IPMI messages: 1, driver state: 2, timing: 4, I2C probe: 8

View File

@@ -95,7 +95,8 @@ since it doesn't need to allocate a table as large as the largest
hwirq number. The disadvantage is that hwirq to IRQ number lookup is
dependent on how many entries are in the table.
Very few drivers should need this mapping.
Very few drivers should need this mapping. At the moment, powerpc
iseries is the only user.
==== No Map ===-
irq_domain_add_nomap()

View File

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
subdir-y := accounting auxdisplay blackfin connector \
subdir-y := accounting arm auxdisplay blackfin connector \
filesystems filesystems ia64 laptops mic misc-devices \
networking pcmcia prctl ptp spi timers vDSO video4linux \
watchdog

View File

@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ retry:
rc = pci_enable_msix_range(adapter->pdev, adapter->msix_entries,
maxvec, maxvec);
/*
* -ENOSPC is the only error code allowed to be analyzed
* -ENOSPC is the only error code allowed to be analized
*/
if (rc == -ENOSPC) {
if (maxvec == 1)
@@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ retry:
return rc;
}
Note how pci_enable_msix_range() return value is analyzed for a fallback -
Note how pci_enable_msix_range() return value is analized for a fallback -
any error code other than -ENOSPC indicates a fatal error and should not
be retried.
@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ during development.
If your device supports both MSI-X and MSI capabilities, you should use
the MSI-X facilities in preference to the MSI facilities. As mentioned
above, MSI-X supports any number of interrupts between 1 and 2048.
In contrast, MSI is restricted to a maximum of 32 interrupts (and
In constrast, MSI is restricted to a maximum of 32 interrupts (and
must be a power of two). In addition, the MSI interrupt vectors must
be allocated consecutively, so the system might not be able to allocate
as many vectors for MSI as it could for MSI-X. On some platforms, MSI
@@ -501,9 +501,18 @@ necessary to disable interrupts (Linux guarantees the same interrupt will
not be re-entered). If a device uses multiple interrupts, the driver
must disable interrupts while the lock is held. If the device sends
a different interrupt, the driver will deadlock trying to recursively
acquire the spinlock. Such deadlocks can be avoided by using
spin_lock_irqsave() or spin_lock_irq() which disable local interrupts
and acquire the lock (see Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking).
acquire the spinlock.
There are two solutions. The first is to take the lock with
spin_lock_irqsave() or spin_lock_irq() (see
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking). The second is to specify
IRQF_DISABLED to request_irq() so that the kernel runs the entire
interrupt routine with interrupts disabled.
If your MSI interrupt routine does not hold the lock for the whole time
it is running, the first solution may be best. The second solution is
normally preferred as it avoids making two transitions from interrupt
disabled to enabled and back again.
4.6 How to tell whether MSI/MSI-X is enabled on a device

View File

@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ STEP 4: Slot Reset
------------------
In response to a return value of PCI_ERS_RESULT_NEED_RESET, the
the platform will perform a slot reset on the requesting PCI device(s).
the platform will peform a slot reset on the requesting PCI device(s).
The actual steps taken by a platform to perform a slot reset
will be platform-dependent. Upon completion of slot reset, the
platform will call the device slot_reset() callback.

View File

@@ -564,14 +564,14 @@ to be handled by platform and generic code, not individual drivers.
8. Vendor and device identifications
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Do not add new device or vendor IDs to include/linux/pci_ids.h unless they
are shared across multiple drivers. You can add private definitions in
your driver if they're helpful, or just use plain hex constants.
One is not required to add new device ids to include/linux/pci_ids.h.
Please add PCI_VENDOR_ID_xxx for vendors and a hex constant for device ids.
The device IDs are arbitrary hex numbers (vendor controlled) and normally used
only in a single location, the pci_device_id table.
PCI_VENDOR_ID_xxx constants are re-used. The device ids are arbitrary
hex numbers (vendor controlled) and normally used only in a single
location, the pci_device_id table.
Please DO submit new vendor/device IDs to http://pciids.sourceforge.net/.
Please DO submit new vendor/device ids to pciids.sourceforge.net project.

View File

@@ -66,8 +66,8 @@ hardware (mostly chipsets) has root ports that cannot obtain the reporting
source ID. nosourceid=n by default.
2.3 AER error output
When a PCI-E AER error is captured, an error message will be outputted to
console. If it's a correctable error, it is outputted as a warning.
When a PCI-E AER error is captured, an error message will be outputed to
console. If it's a correctable error, it is outputed as a warning.
Otherwise, it is printed as an error. So users could choose different
log level to filter out correctable error messages.

View File

@@ -614,8 +614,8 @@ The canonical patch message body contains the following:
- An empty line.
- The body of the explanation, line wrapped at 75 columns, which will
be copied to the permanent changelog to describe this patch.
- The body of the explanation, which will be copied to the
permanent changelog to describe this patch.
- The "Signed-off-by:" lines, described above, which will
also go in the changelog.

View File

@@ -1,177 +1,129 @@
APEI Error INJection
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
EINJ provides a hardware error injection mechanism. It is very useful
for debugging and testing APEI and RAS features in general.
EINJ provides a hardware error injection mechanism
It is very useful for debugging and testing of other APEI and RAS features.
You need to check whether your BIOS supports EINJ first. For that, look
for early boot messages similar to this one:
ACPI: EINJ 0x000000007370A000 000150 (v01 INTEL 00000001 INTL 00000001)
which shows that the BIOS is exposing an EINJ table - it is the
mechanism through which the injection is done.
Alternatively, look in /sys/firmware/acpi/tables for an "EINJ" file,
which is a different representation of the same thing.
It doesn't necessarily mean that EINJ is not supported if those above
don't exist: before you give up, go into BIOS setup to see if the BIOS
has an option to enable error injection. Look for something called WHEA
or similar. Often, you need to enable an ACPI5 support option prior, in
order to see the APEI,EINJ,... functionality supported and exposed by
the BIOS menu.
To use EINJ, make sure the following are options enabled in your kernel
To use EINJ, make sure the following are enabled in your kernel
configuration:
CONFIG_DEBUG_FS
CONFIG_ACPI_APEI
CONFIG_ACPI_APEI_EINJ
The EINJ user interface is in <debugfs mount point>/apei/einj.
The following files belong to it:
The user interface of EINJ is debug file system, under the
directory apei/einj. The following files are provided.
- available_error_type
Reading this file returns the error injection capability of the
platform, that is, which error types are supported. The error type
definition is as follow, the left field is the error type value, the
right field is error description.
This file shows which error types are supported:
0x00000001 Processor Correctable
0x00000002 Processor Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000004 Processor Uncorrectable fatal
0x00000008 Memory Correctable
0x00000010 Memory Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000020 Memory Uncorrectable fatal
0x00000040 PCI Express Correctable
0x00000080 PCI Express Uncorrectable fatal
0x00000100 PCI Express Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000200 Platform Correctable
0x00000400 Platform Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000800 Platform Uncorrectable fatal
Error Type Value Error Description
================ =================
0x00000001 Processor Correctable
0x00000002 Processor Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000004 Processor Uncorrectable fatal
0x00000008 Memory Correctable
0x00000010 Memory Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000020 Memory Uncorrectable fatal
0x00000040 PCI Express Correctable
0x00000080 PCI Express Uncorrectable fatal
0x00000100 PCI Express Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000200 Platform Correctable
0x00000400 Platform Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000800 Platform Uncorrectable fatal
The format of the file contents are as above, except present are only
the available error types.
The format of file contents are as above, except there are only the
available error type lines.
- error_type
Set the value of the error type being injected. Possible error types
are defined in the file available_error_type above.
This file is used to set the error type value. The error type value
is defined in "available_error_type" description.
- error_inject
Write any integer to this file to trigger the error injection. Make
sure you have specified all necessary error parameters, i.e. this
write should be the last step when injecting errors.
Write any integer to this file to trigger the error
injection. Before this, please specify all necessary error
parameters.
- flags
Present for kernel versions 3.13 and above. Used to specify which
of param{1..4} are valid and should be used by the firmware during
injection. Value is a bitmask as specified in ACPI5.0 spec for the
Present for kernel version 3.13 and above. Used to specify which
of param{1..4} are valid and should be used by BIOS during injection.
Value is a bitmask as specified in ACPI5.0 spec for the
SET_ERROR_TYPE_WITH_ADDRESS data structure:
Bit 0 - Processor APIC field valid (see param3 below).
Bit 1 - Memory address and mask valid (param1 and param2).
Bit 2 - PCIe (seg,bus,dev,fn) valid (see param4 below).
If set to zero, legacy behavior is mimicked where the type of
injection specifies just one bit set, and param1 is multiplexed.
Bit 0 - Processor APIC field valid (see param3 below)
Bit 1 - Memory address and mask valid (param1 and param2)
Bit 2 - PCIe (seg,bus,dev,fn) valid (param4 below)
If set to zero, legacy behaviour is used where the type of injection
specifies just one bit set, and param1 is multiplexed.
- param1
This file is used to set the first error parameter value. Its effect
depends on the error type specified in error_type. For example, if
error type is memory related type, the param1 should be a valid
physical memory address. [Unless "flag" is set - see above]
This file is used to set the first error parameter value. Effect of
parameter depends on error_type specified. For example, if error
type is memory related type, the param1 should be a valid physical
memory address. [Unless "flag" is set - see above]
- param2
Same use as param1 above. For example, if error type is of memory
related type, then param2 should be a physical memory address mask.
Linux requires page or narrower granularity, say, 0xfffffffffffff000.
This file is used to set the second error parameter value. Effect of
parameter depends on error_type specified. For example, if error
type is memory related type, the param2 should be a physical memory
address mask. Linux requires page or narrower granularity, say,
0xfffffffffffff000.
- param3
Used when the 0x1 bit is set in "flags" to specify the APIC id
Used when the 0x1 bit is set in "flag" to specify the APIC id
- param4
Used when the 0x4 bit is set in "flags" to specify target PCIe device
Used when the 0x4 bit is set in "flag" to specify target PCIe device
- notrigger
The EINJ mechanism is a two step process. First inject the error, then
perform some actions to trigger it. Setting "notrigger" to 1 skips the
trigger phase, which *may* allow the user to cause the error in some other
context by a simple access to the cpu, memory location, or device that is
the target of the error injection. Whether this actually works depends
on what operations the BIOS actually includes in the trigger phase.
The error injection mechanism is a two-step process. First inject the
error, then perform some actions to trigger it. Setting "notrigger"
to 1 skips the trigger phase, which *may* allow the user to cause the
error in some other context by a simple access to the CPU, memory
location, or device that is the target of the error injection. Whether
this actually works depends on what operations the BIOS actually
includes in the trigger phase.
BIOS versions based in the ACPI 4.0 specification have limited options
to control where the errors are injected. Your BIOS may support an
extension (enabled with the param_extension=1 module parameter, or
boot command line einj.param_extension=1). This allows the address
and mask for memory injections to be specified by the param1 and
param2 files in apei/einj.
BIOS versions based on the ACPI 4.0 specification have limited options
in controlling where the errors are injected. Your BIOS may support an
extension (enabled with the param_extension=1 module parameter, or boot
command line einj.param_extension=1). This allows the address and mask
for memory injections to be specified by the param1 and param2 files in
apei/einj.
BIOS versions based on the ACPI 5.0 specification have more control over
the target of the injection. For processor-related errors (type 0x1, 0x2
and 0x4), you can set flags to 0x3 (param3 for bit 0, and param1 and
param2 for bit 1) so that you have more information added to the error
signature being injected. The actual data passed is this:
memory_address = param1;
memory_address_range = param2;
apicid = param3;
pcie_sbdf = param4;
For memory errors (type 0x8, 0x10 and 0x20) the address is set using
param1 with a mask in param2 (0x0 is equivalent to all ones). For PCI
express errors (type 0x40, 0x80 and 0x100) the segment, bus, device and
function are specified using param1:
BIOS versions using the ACPI 5.0 specification have more control over
the target of the injection. For processor related errors (type 0x1,
0x2 and 0x4) the APICID of the target should be provided using the
param1 file in apei/einj. For memory errors (type 0x8, 0x10 and 0x20)
the address is set using param1 with a mask in param2 (0x0 is equivalent
to all ones). For PCI express errors (type 0x40, 0x80 and 0x100) the
segment, bus, device and function are specified using param1:
31 24 23 16 15 11 10 8 7 0
+-------------------------------------------------+
| segment | bus | device | function | reserved |
+-------------------------------------------------+
Anyway, you get the idea, if there's doubt just take a look at the code
in drivers/acpi/apei/einj.c.
An ACPI 5.0 BIOS may also allow vendor-specific errors to be injected.
An ACPI 5.0 BIOS may also allow vendor specific errors to be injected.
In this case a file named vendor will contain identifying information
from the BIOS that hopefully will allow an application wishing to use
the vendor-specific extension to tell that they are running on a BIOS
the vendor specific extension to tell that they are running on a BIOS
that supports it. All vendor extensions have the 0x80000000 bit set in
error_type. A file vendor_flags controls the interpretation of param1
and param2 (1 = PROCESSOR, 2 = MEMORY, 4 = PCI). See your BIOS vendor
documentation for details (and expect changes to this API if vendors
creativity in using this feature expands beyond our expectations).
An error injection example:
Example:
# cd /sys/kernel/debug/apei/einj
# cat available_error_type # See which errors can be injected
0x00000002 Processor Uncorrectable non-fatal
0x00000008 Memory Correctable
0x00000010 Memory Uncorrectable non-fatal
# echo 0x12345000 > param1 # Set memory address for injection
# echo $((-1 << 12)) > param2 # Mask 0xfffffffffffff000 - anywhere in this page
# echo 0xfffffffffffff000 > param2 # Mask - anywhere in this page
# echo 0x8 > error_type # Choose correctable memory error
# echo 1 > error_inject # Inject now
You should see something like this in dmesg:
[22715.830801] EDAC sbridge MC3: HANDLING MCE MEMORY ERROR
[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: CPU 0: Machine Check Event: 0 Bank 7: 8c00004000010090
[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: TSC 0
[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: ADDR 12345000 EDAC sbridge MC3: MISC 144780c86
[22715.834759] EDAC sbridge MC3: PROCESSOR 0:306e7 TIME 1422553404 SOCKET 0 APIC 0
[22716.616173] EDAC MC3: 1 CE memory read error on CPU_SrcID#0_Channel#0_DIMM#0 (channel:0 slot:0 page:0x12345 offset:0x0 grain:32 syndrome:0x0 - area:DRAM err_code:0001:0090 socket:0 channel_mask:1 rank:0)
For more information about EINJ, please refer to ACPI specification
version 4.0, section 17.5 and ACPI 5.0, section 18.6.

View File

@@ -253,14 +253,9 @@ input driver:
GPIO support
~~~~~~~~~~~~
ACPI 5 introduced two new resources to describe GPIO connections: GpioIo
and GpioInt. These resources can be used to pass GPIO numbers used by
the device to the driver. ACPI 5.1 extended this with _DSD (Device
Specific Data) which made it possible to name the GPIOs among other things.
and GpioInt. These resources are used be used to pass GPIO numbers used by
the device to the driver. For example:
For example:
Device (DEV)
{
Method (_CRS, 0, NotSerialized)
{
Name (SBUF, ResourceTemplate()
@@ -290,18 +285,6 @@ Device (DEV)
Return (SBUF)
}
// ACPI 5.1 _DSD used for naming the GPIOs
Name (_DSD, Package ()
{
ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"),
Package ()
{
Package () {"power-gpios", Package() {^DEV, 0, 0, 0 }},
Package () {"irq-gpios", Package() {^DEV, 1, 0, 0 }},
}
})
...
These GPIO numbers are controller relative and path "\\_SB.PCI0.GPI0"
specifies the path to the controller. In order to use these GPIOs in Linux
we need to translate them to the corresponding Linux GPIO descriptors.
@@ -317,11 +300,11 @@ a code like this:
struct gpio_desc *irq_desc, *power_desc;
irq_desc = gpiod_get(dev, "irq");
irq_desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, NULL, 1);
if (IS_ERR(irq_desc))
/* handle error */
power_desc = gpiod_get(dev, "power");
power_desc = gpiod_get_index(dev, NULL, 0);
if (IS_ERR(power_desc))
/* handle error */
@@ -330,9 +313,6 @@ a code like this:
There are also devm_* versions of these functions which release the
descriptors once the device is released.
See Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt for more information about the
_DSD binding related to GPIOs.
MFD devices
~~~~~~~~~~~
The MFD devices register their children as platform devices. For the child

View File

@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
_DSD Device Properties Related to GPIO
--------------------------------------
With the release of ACPI 5.1, the _DSD configuration object finally
allows names to be given to GPIOs (and other things as well) returned
by _CRS. Previously, we were only able to use an integer index to find
With the release of ACPI 5.1 and the _DSD configuration objecte names
can finally be given to GPIOs (and other things as well) returned by
_CRS. Previously, we were only able to use an integer index to find
the corresponding GPIO, which is pretty error prone (it depends on
the _CRS output ordering, for example).

View File

@@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ IXP4xx
- Intel IXP4xx Network processor.
Makefile
- Build sourcefiles as part of the Documentation-build for arm
msm/
- MSM specific documentation
Netwinder
- Netwinder specific documentation
Porting

View File

@@ -58,18 +58,13 @@ serial format options as described in
--------------------------
Existing boot loaders: OPTIONAL
New boot loaders: MANDATORY except for DT-only platforms
New boot loaders: MANDATORY
The boot loader should detect the machine type its running on by some
method. Whether this is a hard coded value or some algorithm that
looks at the connected hardware is beyond the scope of this document.
The boot loader must ultimately be able to provide a MACH_TYPE_xxx
value to the kernel. (see linux/arch/arm/tools/mach-types). This
should be passed to the kernel in register r1.
For DT-only platforms, the machine type will be determined by device
tree. set the machine type to all ones (~0). This is not strictly
necessary, but assures that it will not match any existing types.
value to the kernel. (see linux/arch/arm/tools/mach-types).
4. Setup boot data
------------------

View File

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
subdir-y := SH-Mobile

View File

@@ -96,11 +96,6 @@ EBU Armada family
88F6820
88F6828
Armada 390/398 Flavors:
88F6920
88F6928
Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-39x/
Armada XP Flavors:
MV78230
MV78260

View File

@@ -185,20 +185,13 @@ Kernel entry (head.S)
board devices are used, or the device is setup, and provides that
machine specific "personality."
For platforms that support device tree (DT), the machine selection is
controlled at runtime by passing the device tree blob to the kernel. At
compile-time, support for the machine type must be selected. This allows for
a single multiplatform kernel build to be used for several machine types.
This fine-grained machine specific selection is controlled by the machine
type ID, which acts both as a run-time and a compile-time code selection
method.
For platforms that do not use device tree, this machine selection is
controlled by the machine type ID, which acts both as a run-time and a
compile-time code selection method. You can register a new machine via the
web site at:
You can register a new machine via the web site at:
<http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/>
Note: Please do not register a machine type for DT-only platforms. If your
platform is DT-only, you do not need a registered machine type.
---
Russell King (15/03/2004)

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
# List of programs to build
hostprogs-y := vrl4
# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
always := $(hostprogs-y)
HOSTCFLAGS_vrl4.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include -I$(srctree)/tools/include

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
/*
* vrl4 format generator
*
* Copyright (C) 2010 Simon Horman
*
* This file is subject to the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public
* License. See the file "COPYING" in the main directory of this archive
* for more details.
*/
/*
* usage: vrl4 < zImage > out
* dd if=out of=/dev/sdx bs=512 seek=1 # Write the image to sector 1
*
* Reads a zImage from stdin and writes a vrl4 image to stdout.
* In practice this means writing a padded vrl4 header to stdout followed
* by the zImage.
*
* The padding places the zImage at ALIGN bytes into the output.
* The vrl4 uses ALIGN + START_BASE as the start_address.
* This is where the mask ROM will jump to after verifying the header.
*
* The header sets copy_size to min(sizeof(zImage), MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN) + ALIGN.
* That is, the mask ROM will load the padded header (ALIGN bytes)
* And then MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN bytes of the image, or the entire image,
* whichever is smaller.
*
* The zImage is not modified in any way.
*/
#define _BSD_SOURCE
#include <endian.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <stdint.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <tools/endian.h>
struct hdr {
uint32_t magic1;
uint32_t reserved1;
uint32_t magic2;
uint32_t reserved2;
uint16_t copy_size;
uint16_t boot_options;
uint32_t reserved3;
uint32_t start_address;
uint32_t reserved4;
uint32_t reserved5;
char reserved6[308];
};
#define DECLARE_HDR(h) \
struct hdr (h) = { \
.magic1 = htole32(0xea000000), \
.reserved1 = htole32(0x56), \
.magic2 = htole32(0xe59ff008), \
.reserved3 = htole16(0x1) }
/* Align to 512 bytes, the MMCIF sector size */
#define ALIGN_BITS 9
#define ALIGN (1 << ALIGN_BITS)
#define START_BASE 0xe55b0000
/*
* With an alignment of 512 the header uses the first sector.
* There is a 128 sector (64kbyte) limit on the data loaded by the mask ROM.
* So there are 127 sectors left for the boot programme. But in practice
* Only a small portion of a zImage is needed, 16 sectors should be more
* than enough.
*
* Note that this sets how much of the zImage is copied by the mask ROM.
* The entire zImage is present after the header and is loaded
* by the code in the boot program (which is the first portion of the zImage).
*/
#define MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN (16 * 512)
#define ROUND_UP(x) ((x + ALIGN - 1) & ~(ALIGN - 1))
static ssize_t do_read(int fd, void *buf, size_t count)
{
size_t offset = 0;
ssize_t l;
while (offset < count) {
l = read(fd, buf + offset, count - offset);
if (!l)
break;
if (l < 0) {
if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK)
continue;
perror("read");
return -1;
}
offset += l;
}
return offset;
}
static ssize_t do_write(int fd, const void *buf, size_t count)
{
size_t offset = 0;
ssize_t l;
while (offset < count) {
l = write(fd, buf + offset, count - offset);
if (l < 0) {
if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK)
continue;
perror("write");
return -1;
}
offset += l;
}
return offset;
}
static ssize_t write_zero(int fd, size_t len)
{
size_t i = len;
while (i--) {
const char x = 0;
if (do_write(fd, &x, 1) < 0)
return -1;
}
return len;
}
int main(void)
{
DECLARE_HDR(hdr);
char boot_program[MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN];
size_t aligned_hdr_len, alligned_prog_len;
ssize_t prog_len;
prog_len = do_read(0, boot_program, sizeof(boot_program));
if (prog_len <= 0)
return -1;
aligned_hdr_len = ROUND_UP(sizeof(hdr));
hdr.start_address = htole32(START_BASE + aligned_hdr_len);
alligned_prog_len = ROUND_UP(prog_len);
hdr.copy_size = htole16(aligned_hdr_len + alligned_prog_len);
if (do_write(1, &hdr, sizeof(hdr)) < 0)
return -1;
if (write_zero(1, aligned_hdr_len - sizeof(hdr)) < 0)
return -1;
if (do_write(1, boot_program, prog_len) < 0)
return 1;
/* Write out the rest of the kernel */
while (1) {
prog_len = do_read(0, boot_program, sizeof(boot_program));
if (prog_len < 0)
return 1;
if (prog_len == 0)
break;
if (do_write(1, boot_program, prog_len) < 0)
return 1;
}
return 0;
}

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
ROM-able zImage boot from MMC
-----------------------------
An ROM-able zImage compiled with ZBOOT_ROM_MMCIF may be written to MMC and
SuperH Mobile ARM will to boot directly from the MMCIF hardware block.
This is achieved by the mask ROM loading the first portion of the image into
MERAM and then jumping to it. This portion contains loader code which
copies the entire image to SDRAM and jumps to it. From there the zImage
boot code proceeds as normal, uncompressing the image into its final
location and then jumping to it.
This code has been tested on an AP4EB board using the developer 1A eMMC
boot mode which is configured using the following jumper settings.
The board used for testing required a patched mask ROM in order for
this mode to function.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
x|x|x|x|x| |x|
S4 -+-+-+-+-+-+-+-
| | | | |x| |x on
The zImage must be written to the MMC card at sector 1 (512 bytes) in
vrl4 format. A utility vrl4 is supplied to accomplish this.
e.g.
vrl4 < zImage | dd of=/dev/sdX bs=512 seek=1
A dual-voltage MMC 4.0 card was used for testing.

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
ROM-able zImage boot from eSD
-----------------------------
An ROM-able zImage compiled with ZBOOT_ROM_SDHI may be written to eSD and
SuperH Mobile ARM will to boot directly from the SDHI hardware block.
This is achieved by the mask ROM loading the first portion of the image into
MERAM and then jumping to it. This portion contains loader code which
copies the entire image to SDRAM and jumps to it. From there the zImage
boot code proceeds as normal, uncompressing the image into its final
location and then jumping to it.
This code has been tested on an mackerel board using the developer 1A eSD
boot mode which is configured using the following jumper settings.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
x|x|x|x| |x|x|
S4 -+-+-+-+-+-+-+-
| | | |x| | |x on
The eSD card needs to be present in SDHI slot 1 (CN7).
As such S1 and S33 also need to be configured as per
the notes in arch/arm/mach-shmobile/board-mackerel.c.
A partial zImage must be written to physical partition #1 (boot)
of the eSD at sector 0 in vrl4 format. A utility vrl4 is supplied to
accomplish this.
e.g.
vrl4 < zImage | dd of=/dev/sdX bs=512 count=17
A full copy of _the same_ zImage should be written to physical partition #1
(boot) of the eSD at sector 0. This should _not_ be in vrl4 format.
vrl4 < zImage | dd of=/dev/sdX bs=512
Note: The commands above assume that the physical partition has been
switched. No such facility currently exists in the Linux Kernel.
Physical partitions are described in the eSD specification. At the time of
writing they are not the same as partitions that are typically configured
using fdisk and visible through /proc/partitions

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
This document provides an overview of the msm_gpiomux interface, which
is used to provide gpio pin multiplexing and configuration on mach-msm
targets.
History
=======
The first-generation API for gpio configuration & multiplexing on msm
is the function gpio_tlmm_config(). This function has a few notable
shortcomings, which led to its deprecation and replacement by gpiomux:
The 'disable' parameter: Setting the second parameter to
gpio_tlmm_config to GPIO_CFG_DISABLE tells the peripheral
processor in charge of the subsystem to perform a look-up into a
low-power table and apply the low-power/sleep setting for the pin.
As the msm family evolved this became problematic. Not all pins
have sleep settings, not all peripheral processors will accept requests
to apply said sleep settings, and not all msm targets have their gpio
subsystems managed by a peripheral processor. In order to get consistent
behavior on all targets, drivers are forced to ignore this parameter,
rendering it useless.
The 'direction' flag: for all mux-settings other than raw-gpio (0),
the output-enable bit of a gpio is hard-wired to a known
input (usually VDD or ground). For those settings, the direction flag
is meaningless at best, and deceptive at worst. In addition, using the
direction flag to change output-enable (OE) directly can cause trouble in
gpiolib, which has no visibility into gpio direction changes made
in this way. Direction control in gpio mode should be made through gpiolib.
Key Features of gpiomux
=======================
- A consistent interface across all generations of msm. Drivers can expect
the same results on every target.
- gpiomux plays nicely with gpiolib. Functions that should belong to gpiolib
are left to gpiolib and not duplicated here. gpiomux is written with the
intent that gpio_chips will call gpiomux reference-counting methods
from their request() and free() hooks, providing full integration.
- Tabular configuration. Instead of having to call gpio_tlmm_config
hundreds of times, gpio configuration is placed in a single table.
- Per-gpio sleep. Each gpio is individually reference counted, allowing only
those lines which are in use to be put in high-power states.
- 0 means 'do nothing': all flags are designed so that the default memset-zero
equates to a sensible default of 'no configuration', preventing users
from having to provide hundreds of 'no-op' configs for unused or
unwanted lines.
Usage
=====
To use gpiomux, provide configuration information for relevant gpio lines
in the msm_gpiomux_configs table. Since a 0 equates to "unconfigured",
only those lines to be managed by gpiomux need to be specified. Here
is a completely fictional example:
struct msm_gpiomux_config msm_gpiomux_configs[GPIOMUX_NGPIOS] = {
[12] = {
.active = GPIOMUX_VALID | GPIOMUX_DRV_8MA | GPIOMUX_FUNC_1,
.suspended = GPIOMUX_VALID | GPIOMUX_PULL_DOWN,
},
[34] = {
.suspended = GPIOMUX_VALID | GPIOMUX_PULL_DOWN,
},
};
To indicate that a gpio is in use, call msm_gpiomux_get() to increase
its reference count. To decrease the reference count, call msm_gpiomux_put().
The effect of this configuration is as follows:
When the system boots, gpios 12 and 34 will be initialized with their
'suspended' configurations. All other gpios, which were left unconfigured,
will not be touched.
When msm_gpiomux_get() is called on gpio 12 to raise its reference count
above 0, its active configuration will be applied. Since no other gpio
line has a valid active configuration, msm_gpiomux_get() will have no
effect on any other line.
When msm_gpiomux_put() is called on gpio 12 or 34 to drop their reference
count to 0, their suspended configurations will be applied.
Since no other gpio line has a valid suspended configuration, no other
gpio line will be effected by msm_gpiomux_put(). Since gpio 34 has no valid
active configuration, this is effectively a no-op for gpio 34 as well,
with one small caveat, see the section "About Output-Enable Settings".
All of the GPIOMUX_VALID flags may seem like unnecessary overhead, but
they address some important issues. As unused entries (all those
except 12 and 34) are zero-filled, gpiomux needs a way to distinguish
the used fields from the unused. In addition, the all-zero pattern
is a valid configuration! Therefore, gpiomux defines an additional bit
which is used to indicate when a field is used. This has the pleasant
side-effect of allowing calls to msm_gpiomux_write to use '0' to indicate
that a value should not be changed:
msm_gpiomux_write(0, GPIOMUX_VALID, 0);
replaces the active configuration of gpio 0 with an all-zero configuration,
but leaves the suspended configuration as it was.
Static Configurations
=====================
To install a static configuration, which is applied at boot and does
not change after that, install a configuration with a suspended component
but no active component, as in the previous example:
[34] = {
.suspended = GPIOMUX_VALID | GPIOMUX_PULL_DOWN,
},
The suspended setting is applied during boot, and the lack of any valid
active setting prevents any other setting from being applied at runtime.
If other subsystems attempting to access the line is a concern, one could
*really* anchor the configuration down by calling msm_gpiomux_get on the
line at initialization to move the line into active mode. With the line
held, it will never be re-suspended, and with no valid active configuration,
no new configurations will be applied.
But then, if having other subsystems grabbing for the line is truly a concern,
it should be reserved with gpio_request instead, which carries an implicit
msm_gpiomux_get.
gpiomux and gpiolib
===================
It is expected that msm gpio_chips will call msm_gpiomux_get() and
msm_gpiomux_put() from their request and free hooks, like this fictional
example:
static int request(struct gpio_chip *chip, unsigned offset)
{
return msm_gpiomux_get(chip->base + offset);
}
static void free(struct gpio_chip *chip, unsigned offset)
{
msm_gpiomux_put(chip->base + offset);
}
...somewhere in a gpio_chip declaration...
.request = request,
.free = free,
This provides important functionality:
- It guarantees that a gpio line will have its 'active' config applied
when the line is requested, and will not be suspended while the line
remains requested; and
- It guarantees that gpio-direction settings from gpiolib behave sensibly.
See "About Output-Enable Settings."
This mechanism allows for "auto-request" of gpiomux lines via gpiolib
when it is suitable. Drivers wishing more exact control are, of course,
free to also use msm_gpiomux_set and msm_gpiomux_get.
About Output-Enable Settings
============================
Some msm targets do not have the ability to query the current gpio
configuration setting. This means that changes made to the output-enable
(OE) bit by gpiolib cannot be consistently detected and preserved by gpiomux.
Therefore, when gpiomux applies a configuration setting, any direction
settings which may have been applied by gpiolib are lost and the default
input settings are re-applied.
For this reason, drivers should not assume that gpio direction settings
continue to hold if they free and then re-request a gpio. This seems like
common sense - after all, anybody could have obtained the line in the
meantime - but it needs saying.
This also means that calls to msm_gpiomux_write will reset the OE bit,
which means that if the gpio line is held by a client of gpiolib and
msm_gpiomux_write is called, the direction setting has been lost and
gpiolib's internal state has been broken.
Release gpio lines before reconfiguring them.

View File

@@ -1,593 +0,0 @@
ACPI Tables
-----------
The expectations of individual ACPI tables are discussed in the list that
follows.
If a section number is used, it refers to a section number in the ACPI
specification where the object is defined. If "Signature Reserved" is used,
the table signature (the first four bytes of the table) is the only portion
of the table recognized by the specification, and the actual table is defined
outside of the UEFI Forum (see Section 5.2.6 of the specification).
For ACPI on arm64, tables also fall into the following categories:
-- Required: DSDT, FADT, GTDT, MADT, MCFG, RSDP, SPCR, XSDT
-- Recommended: BERT, EINJ, ERST, HEST, SSDT
-- Optional: BGRT, CPEP, CSRT, DRTM, ECDT, FACS, FPDT, MCHI, MPST,
MSCT, RASF, SBST, SLIT, SPMI, SRAT, TCPA, TPM2, UEFI
-- Not supported: BOOT, DBG2, DBGP, DMAR, ETDT, HPET, IBFT, IVRS,
LPIT, MSDM, RSDT, SLIC, WAET, WDAT, WDRT, WPBT
Table Usage for ARMv8 Linux
----- ----------------------------------------------------------------
BERT Section 18.3 (signature == "BERT")
== Boot Error Record Table ==
Must be supplied if RAS support is provided by the platform. It
is recommended this table be supplied.
BOOT Signature Reserved (signature == "BOOT")
== simple BOOT flag table ==
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
BGRT Section 5.2.22 (signature == "BGRT")
== Boot Graphics Resource Table ==
Optional, not currently supported, with no real use-case for an
ARM server.
CPEP Section 5.2.18 (signature == "CPEP")
== Corrected Platform Error Polling table ==
Optional, not currently supported, and not recommended until such
time as ARM-compatible hardware is available, and the specification
suitably modified.
CSRT Signature Reserved (signature == "CSRT")
== Core System Resources Table ==
Optional, not currently supported.
DBG2 Signature Reserved (signature == "DBG2")
== DeBuG port table 2 ==
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
DBGP Signature Reserved (signature == "DBGP")
== DeBuG Port table ==
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
DSDT Section 5.2.11.1 (signature == "DSDT")
== Differentiated System Description Table ==
A DSDT is required; see also SSDT.
ACPI tables contain only one DSDT but can contain one or more SSDTs,
which are optional. Each SSDT can only add to the ACPI namespace,
but cannot modify or replace anything in the DSDT.
DMAR Signature Reserved (signature == "DMAR")
== DMA Remapping table ==
x86 only table, will not be supported.
DRTM Signature Reserved (signature == "DRTM")
== Dynamic Root of Trust for Measurement table ==
Optional, not currently supported.
ECDT Section 5.2.16 (signature == "ECDT")
== Embedded Controller Description Table ==
Optional, not currently supported, but could be used on ARM if and
only if one uses the GPE_BIT field to represent an IRQ number, since
there are no GPE blocks defined in hardware reduced mode. This would
need to be modified in the ACPI specification.
EINJ Section 18.6 (signature == "EINJ")
== Error Injection table ==
This table is very useful for testing platform response to error
conditions; it allows one to inject an error into the system as
if it had actually occurred. However, this table should not be
shipped with a production system; it should be dynamically loaded
and executed with the ACPICA tools only during testing.
ERST Section 18.5 (signature == "ERST")
== Error Record Serialization Table ==
On a platform supports RAS, this table must be supplied if it is not
UEFI-based; if it is UEFI-based, this table may be supplied. When this
table is not present, UEFI run time service will be utilized to save
and retrieve hardware error information to and from a persistent store.
ETDT Signature Reserved (signature == "ETDT")
== Event Timer Description Table ==
Obsolete table, will not be supported.
FACS Section 5.2.10 (signature == "FACS")
== Firmware ACPI Control Structure ==
It is unlikely that this table will be terribly useful. If it is
provided, the Global Lock will NOT be used since it is not part of
the hardware reduced profile, and only 64-bit address fields will
be considered valid.
FADT Section 5.2.9 (signature == "FACP")
== Fixed ACPI Description Table ==
Required for arm64.
The HW_REDUCED_ACPI flag must be set. All of the fields that are
to be ignored when HW_REDUCED_ACPI is set are expected to be set to
zero.
If an FACS table is provided, the X_FIRMWARE_CTRL field is to be
used, not FIRMWARE_CTRL.
If PSCI is used (as is recommended), make sure that ARM_BOOT_ARCH is
filled in properly -- that the PSCI_COMPLIANT flag is set and that
PSCI_USE_HVC is set or unset as needed (see table 5-37).
For the DSDT that is also required, the X_DSDT field is to be used,
not the DSDT field.
FPDT Section 5.2.23 (signature == "FPDT")
== Firmware Performance Data Table ==
Optional, not currently supported.
GTDT Section 5.2.24 (signature == "GTDT")
== Generic Timer Description Table ==
Required for arm64.
HEST Section 18.3.2 (signature == "HEST")
== Hardware Error Source Table ==
Until further error source types are defined, use only types 6 (AER
Root Port), 7 (AER Endpoint), 8 (AER Bridge), or 9 (Generic Hardware
Error Source). Firmware first error handling is possible if and only
if Trusted Firmware is being used on arm64.
Must be supplied if RAS support is provided by the platform. It
is recommended this table be supplied.
HPET Signature Reserved (signature == "HPET")
== High Precision Event timer Table ==
x86 only table, will not be supported.
IBFT Signature Reserved (signature == "IBFT")
== iSCSI Boot Firmware Table ==
Microsoft defined table, support TBD.
IVRS Signature Reserved (signature == "IVRS")
== I/O Virtualization Reporting Structure ==
x86_64 (AMD) only table, will not be supported.
LPIT Signature Reserved (signature == "LPIT")
== Low Power Idle Table ==
x86 only table as of ACPI 5.1; future versions have been adapted for
use with ARM and will be recommended in order to support ACPI power
management.
MADT Section 5.2.12 (signature == "APIC")
== Multiple APIC Description Table ==
Required for arm64. Only the GIC interrupt controller structures
should be used (types 0xA - 0xE).
MCFG Signature Reserved (signature == "MCFG")
== Memory-mapped ConFiGuration space ==
If the platform supports PCI/PCIe, an MCFG table is required.
MCHI Signature Reserved (signature == "MCHI")
== Management Controller Host Interface table ==
Optional, not currently supported.
MPST Section 5.2.21 (signature == "MPST")
== Memory Power State Table ==
Optional, not currently supported.
MSDM Signature Reserved (signature == "MSDM")
== Microsoft Data Management table ==
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
MSCT Section 5.2.19 (signature == "MSCT")
== Maximum System Characteristic Table ==
Optional, not currently supported.
RASF Section 5.2.20 (signature == "RASF")
== RAS Feature table ==
Optional, not currently supported.
RSDP Section 5.2.5 (signature == "RSD PTR")
== Root System Description PoinTeR ==
Required for arm64.
RSDT Section 5.2.7 (signature == "RSDT")
== Root System Description Table ==
Since this table can only provide 32-bit addresses, it is deprecated
on arm64, and will not be used.
SBST Section 5.2.14 (signature == "SBST")
== Smart Battery Subsystem Table ==
Optional, not currently supported.
SLIC Signature Reserved (signature == "SLIC")
== Software LIcensing table ==
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
SLIT Section 5.2.17 (signature == "SLIT")
== System Locality distance Information Table ==
Optional in general, but required for NUMA systems.
SPCR Signature Reserved (signature == "SPCR")
== Serial Port Console Redirection table ==
Required for arm64.
SPMI Signature Reserved (signature == "SPMI")
== Server Platform Management Interface table ==
Optional, not currently supported.
SRAT Section 5.2.16 (signature == "SRAT")
== System Resource Affinity Table ==
Optional, but if used, only the GICC Affinity structures are read.
To support NUMA, this table is required.
SSDT Section 5.2.11.2 (signature == "SSDT")
== Secondary System Description Table ==
These tables are a continuation of the DSDT; these are recommended
for use with devices that can be added to a running system, but can
also serve the purpose of dividing up device descriptions into more
manageable pieces.
An SSDT can only ADD to the ACPI namespace. It cannot modify or
replace existing device descriptions already in the namespace.
These tables are optional, however. ACPI tables should contain only
one DSDT but can contain many SSDTs.
TCPA Signature Reserved (signature == "TCPA")
== Trusted Computing Platform Alliance table ==
Optional, not currently supported, and may need changes to fully
interoperate with arm64.
TPM2 Signature Reserved (signature == "TPM2")
== Trusted Platform Module 2 table ==
Optional, not currently supported, and may need changes to fully
interoperate with arm64.
UEFI Signature Reserved (signature == "UEFI")
== UEFI ACPI data table ==
Optional, not currently supported. No known use case for arm64,
at present.
WAET Signature Reserved (signature == "WAET")
== Windows ACPI Emulated devices Table ==
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
WDAT Signature Reserved (signature == "WDAT")
== Watch Dog Action Table ==
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
WDRT Signature Reserved (signature == "WDRT")
== Watch Dog Resource Table ==
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
WPBT Signature Reserved (signature == "WPBT")
== Windows Platform Binary Table ==
Microsoft only table, will not be supported.
XSDT Section 5.2.8 (signature == "XSDT")
== eXtended System Description Table ==
Required for arm64.
ACPI Objects
------------
The expectations on individual ACPI objects are discussed in the list that
follows:
Name Section Usage for ARMv8 Linux
---- ------------ -------------------------------------------------
_ADR 6.1.1 Use as needed.
_BBN 6.5.5 Use as needed; PCI-specific.
_BDN 6.5.3 Optional; not likely to be used on arm64.
_CCA 6.2.17 This method should be defined for all bus masters
on arm64. While cache coherency is assumed, making
it explicit ensures the kernel will set up DMA as
it should.
_CDM 6.2.1 Optional, to be used only for processor devices.
_CID 6.1.2 Use as needed.
_CLS 6.1.3 Use as needed.
_CRS 6.2.2 Required on arm64.
_DCK 6.5.2 Optional; not likely to be used on arm64.
_DDN 6.1.4 This field can be used for a device name. However,
it is meant for DOS device names (e.g., COM1), so be
careful of its use across OSes.
_DEP 6.5.8 Use as needed.
_DIS 6.2.3 Optional, for power management use.
_DLM 5.7.5 Optional.
_DMA 6.2.4 Optional.
_DSD 6.2.5 To be used with caution. If this object is used, try
to use it within the constraints already defined by the
Device Properties UUID. Only in rare circumstances
should it be necessary to create a new _DSD UUID.
In either case, submit the _DSD definition along with
any driver patches for discussion, especially when
device properties are used. A driver will not be
considered complete without a corresponding _DSD
description. Once approved by kernel maintainers,
the UUID or device properties must then be registered
with the UEFI Forum; this may cause some iteration as
more than one OS will be registering entries.
_DSM Do not use this method. It is not standardized, the
return values are not well documented, and it is
currently a frequent source of error.
_DSW 7.2.1 Use as needed; power management specific.
_EDL 6.3.1 Optional.
_EJD 6.3.2 Optional.
_EJx 6.3.3 Optional.
_FIX 6.2.7 x86 specific, not used on arm64.
\_GL 5.7.1 This object is not to be used in hardware reduced
mode, and therefore should not be used on arm64.
_GLK 6.5.7 This object requires a global lock be defined; there
is no global lock on arm64 since it runs in hardware
reduced mode. Hence, do not use this object on arm64.
\_GPE 5.3.1 This namespace is for x86 use only. Do not use it
on arm64.
_GSB 6.2.7 Optional.
_HID 6.1.5 Use as needed. This is the primary object to use in
device probing, though _CID and _CLS may also be used.
_HPP 6.2.8 Optional, PCI specific.
_HPX 6.2.9 Optional, PCI specific.
_HRV 6.1.6 Optional, use as needed to clarify device behavior; in
some cases, this may be easier to use than _DSD.
_INI 6.5.1 Not required, but can be useful in setting up devices
when UEFI leaves them in a state that may not be what
the driver expects before it starts probing.
_IRC 7.2.15 Use as needed; power management specific.
_LCK 6.3.4 Optional.
_MAT 6.2.10 Optional; see also the MADT.
_MLS 6.1.7 Optional, but highly recommended for use in
internationalization.
_OFF 7.1.2 It is recommended to define this method for any device
that can be turned on or off.
_ON 7.1.3 It is recommended to define this method for any device
that can be turned on or off.
\_OS 5.7.3 This method will return "Linux" by default (this is
the value of the macro ACPI_OS_NAME on Linux). The
command line parameter acpi_os=<string> can be used
to set it to some other value.
_OSC 6.2.11 This method can be a global method in ACPI (i.e.,
\_SB._OSC), or it may be associated with a specific
device (e.g., \_SB.DEV0._OSC), or both. When used
as a global method, only capabilities published in
the ACPI specification are allowed. When used as
a device-specific method, the process described for
using _DSD MUST be used to create an _OSC definition;
out-of-process use of _OSC is not allowed. That is,
submit the device-specific _OSC usage description as
part of the kernel driver submission, get it approved
by the kernel community, then register it with the
UEFI Forum.
\_OSI 5.7.2 Deprecated on ARM64. Any invocation of this method
will print a warning on the console and return false.
That is, as far as ACPI firmware is concerned, _OSI
cannot be used to determine what sort of system is
being used or what functionality is provided. The
_OSC method is to be used instead.
_OST 6.3.5 Optional.
_PDC 8.4.1 Deprecated, do not use on arm64.
\_PIC 5.8.1 The method should not be used. On arm64, the only
interrupt model available is GIC.
_PLD 6.1.8 Optional.
\_PR 5.3.1 This namespace is for x86 use only on legacy systems.
Do not use it on arm64.
_PRS 6.2.12 Optional.
_PRT 6.2.13 Required as part of the definition of all PCI root
devices.
_PRW 7.2.13 Use as needed; power management specific.
_PRx 7.2.8-11 Use as needed; power management specific. If _PR0 is
defined, _PR3 must also be defined.
_PSC 7.2.6 Use as needed; power management specific.
_PSE 7.2.7 Use as needed; power management specific.
_PSW 7.2.14 Use as needed; power management specific.
_PSx 7.2.2-5 Use as needed; power management specific. If _PS0 is
defined, _PS3 must also be defined. If clocks or
regulators need adjusting to be consistent with power
usage, change them in these methods.
\_PTS 7.3.1 Use as needed; power management specific.
_PXM 6.2.14 Optional.
_REG 6.5.4 Use as needed.
\_REV 5.7.4 Always returns the latest version of ACPI supported.
_RMV 6.3.6 Optional.
\_SB 5.3.1 Required on arm64; all devices must be defined in this
namespace.
_SEG 6.5.6 Use as needed; PCI-specific.
\_SI 5.3.1, Optional.
9.1
_SLI 6.2.15 Optional; recommended when SLIT table is in use.
_STA 6.3.7, It is recommended to define this method for any device
7.1.4 that can be turned on or off.
_SRS 6.2.16 Optional; see also _PRS.
_STR 6.1.10 Recommended for conveying device names to end users;
this is preferred over using _DDN.
_SUB 6.1.9 Use as needed; _HID or _CID are preferred.
_SUN 6.1.11 Optional.
\_Sx 7.3.2 Use as needed; power management specific.
_SxD 7.2.16-19 Use as needed; power management specific.
_SxW 7.2.20-24 Use as needed; power management specific.
_SWS 7.3.3 Use as needed; power management specific; this may
require specification changes for use on arm64.
\_TTS 7.3.4 Use as needed; power management specific.
\_TZ 5.3.1 Optional.
_UID 6.1.12 Recommended for distinguishing devices of the same
class; define it if at all possible.
\_WAK 7.3.5 Use as needed; power management specific.
ACPI Event Model
----------------
Do not use GPE block devices; these are not supported in the hardware reduced
profile used by arm64. Since there are no GPE blocks defined for use on ARM
platforms, GPIO-signaled interrupts should be used for creating system events.
ACPI Processor Control
----------------------
Section 8 of the ACPI specification is currently undergoing change that
should be completed in the 6.0 version of the specification. Processor
performance control will be handled differently for arm64 at that point
in time. Processor aggregator devices (section 8.5) will not be used,
for example, but another similar mechanism instead.
While UEFI constrains what we can say until the release of 6.0, it is
recommended that CPPC (8.4.5) be used as the primary model. This will
still be useful into the future. C-states and P-states will still be
provided, but most of the current design work appears to favor CPPC.
Further, it is essential that the ARMv8 SoC provide a fully functional
implementation of PSCI; this will be the only mechanism supported by ACPI
to control CPU power state (including secondary CPU booting).
More details will be provided on the release of the ACPI 6.0 specification.
ACPI System Address Map Interfaces
----------------------------------
In Section 15 of the ACPI specification, several methods are mentioned as
possible mechanisms for conveying memory resource information to the kernel.
For arm64, we will only support UEFI for booting with ACPI, hence the UEFI
GetMemoryMap() boot service is the only mechanism that will be used.
ACPI Platform Error Interfaces (APEI)
-------------------------------------
The APEI tables supported are described above.
APEI requires the equivalent of an SCI and an NMI on ARMv8. The SCI is used
to notify the OSPM of errors that have occurred but can be corrected and the
system can continue correct operation, even if possibly degraded. The NMI is
used to indicate fatal errors that cannot be corrected, and require immediate
attention.
Since there is no direct equivalent of the x86 SCI or NMI, arm64 handles
these slightly differently. The SCI is handled as a normal GPIO-signaled
interrupt; given that these are corrected (or correctable) errors being
reported, this is sufficient. The NMI is emulated as the highest priority
GPIO-signaled interrupt possible. This implies some caution must be used
since there could be interrupts at higher privilege levels or even interrupts
at the same priority as the emulated NMI. In Linux, this should not be the
case but one should be aware it could happen.
ACPI Objects Not Supported on ARM64
-----------------------------------
While this may change in the future, there are several classes of objects
that can be defined, but are not currently of general interest to ARM servers.
These are not supported:
-- Section 9.2: ambient light sensor devices
-- Section 9.3: battery devices
-- Section 9.4: lids (e.g., laptop lids)
-- Section 9.8.2: IDE controllers
-- Section 9.9: floppy controllers
-- Section 9.10: GPE block devices
-- Section 9.15: PC/AT RTC/CMOS devices
-- Section 9.16: user presence detection devices
-- Section 9.17: I/O APIC devices; all GICs must be enumerable via MADT
-- Section 9.18: time and alarm devices (see 9.15)
ACPI Objects Not Yet Implemented
--------------------------------
While these objects have x86 equivalents, and they do make some sense in ARM
servers, there is either no hardware available at present, or in some cases
there may not yet be a non-ARM implementation. Hence, they are currently not
implemented though that may change in the future.
Not yet implemented are:
-- Section 10: power source and power meter devices
-- Section 11: thermal management
-- Section 12: embedded controllers interface
-- Section 13: SMBus interfaces
-- Section 17: NUMA support (prototypes have been submitted for
review)

View File

@@ -1,505 +0,0 @@
ACPI on ARMv8 Servers
---------------------
ACPI can be used for ARMv8 general purpose servers designed to follow
the ARM SBSA (Server Base System Architecture) [0] and SBBR (Server
Base Boot Requirements) [1] specifications. Please note that the SBBR
can be retrieved simply by visiting [1], but the SBSA is currently only
available to those with an ARM login due to ARM IP licensing concerns.
The ARMv8 kernel implements the reduced hardware model of ACPI version
5.1 or later. Links to the specification and all external documents
it refers to are managed by the UEFI Forum. The specification is
available at http://www.uefi.org/specifications and documents referenced
by the specification can be found via http://www.uefi.org/acpi.
If an ARMv8 system does not meet the requirements of the SBSA and SBBR,
or cannot be described using the mechanisms defined in the required ACPI
specifications, then ACPI may not be a good fit for the hardware.
While the documents mentioned above set out the requirements for building
industry-standard ARMv8 servers, they also apply to more than one operating
system. The purpose of this document is to describe the interaction between
ACPI and Linux only, on an ARMv8 system -- that is, what Linux expects of
ACPI and what ACPI can expect of Linux.
Why ACPI on ARM?
----------------
Before examining the details of the interface between ACPI and Linux, it is
useful to understand why ACPI is being used. Several technologies already
exist in Linux for describing non-enumerable hardware, after all. In this
section we summarize a blog post [2] from Grant Likely that outlines the
reasoning behind ACPI on ARMv8 servers. Actually, we snitch a good portion
of the summary text almost directly, to be honest.
The short form of the rationale for ACPI on ARM is:
-- ACPIs bytecode (AML) allows the platform to encode hardware behavior,
while DT explicitly does not support this. For hardware vendors, being
able to encode behavior is a key tool used in supporting operating
system releases on new hardware.
-- ACPIs OSPM defines a power management model that constrains what the
platform is allowed to do into a specific model, while still providing
flexibility in hardware design.
-- In the enterprise server environment, ACPI has established bindings (such
as for RAS) which are currently used in production systems. DT does not.
Such bindings could be defined in DT at some point, but doing so means ARM
and x86 would end up using completely different code paths in both firmware
and the kernel.
-- Choosing a single interface to describe the abstraction between a platform
and an OS is important. Hardware vendors would not be required to implement
both DT and ACPI if they want to support multiple operating systems. And,
agreeing on a single interface instead of being fragmented into per OS
interfaces makes for better interoperability overall.
-- The new ACPI governance process works well and Linux is now at the same
table as hardware vendors and other OS vendors. In fact, there is no
longer any reason to feel that ACPI is only belongs to Windows or that
Linux is in any way secondary to Microsoft in this arena. The move of
ACPI governance into the UEFI forum has significantly opened up the
specification development process, and currently, a large portion of the
changes being made to ACPI is being driven by Linux.
Key to the use of ACPI is the support model. For servers in general, the
responsibility for hardware behaviour cannot solely be the domain of the
kernel, but rather must be split between the platform and the kernel, in
order to allow for orderly change over time. ACPI frees the OS from needing
to understand all the minute details of the hardware so that the OS doesnt
need to be ported to each and every device individually. It allows the
hardware vendors to take responsibility for power management behaviour without
depending on an OS release cycle which is not under their control.
ACPI is also important because hardware and OS vendors have already worked
out the mechanisms for supporting a general purpose computing ecosystem. The
infrastructure is in place, the bindings are in place, and the processes are
in place. DT does exactly what Linux needs it to when working with vertically
integrated devices, but there are no good processes for supporting what the
server vendors need. Linux could potentially get there with DT, but doing so
really just duplicates something that already works. ACPI already does what
the hardware vendors need, Microsoft wont collaborate on DT, and hardware
vendors would still end up providing two completely separate firmware
interfaces -- one for Linux and one for Windows.
Kernel Compatibility
--------------------
One of the primary motivations for ACPI is standardization, and using that
to provide backward compatibility for Linux kernels. In the server market,
software and hardware are often used for long periods. ACPI allows the
kernel and firmware to agree on a consistent abstraction that can be
maintained over time, even as hardware or software change. As long as the
abstraction is supported, systems can be updated without necessarily having
to replace the kernel.
When a Linux driver or subsystem is first implemented using ACPI, it by
definition ends up requiring a specific version of the ACPI specification
-- it's baseline. ACPI firmware must continue to work, even though it may
not be optimal, with the earliest kernel version that first provides support
for that baseline version of ACPI. There may be a need for additional drivers,
but adding new functionality (e.g., CPU power management) should not break
older kernel versions. Further, ACPI firmware must also work with the most
recent version of the kernel.
Relationship with Device Tree
-----------------------------
ACPI support in drivers and subsystems for ARMv8 should never be mutually
exclusive with DT support at compile time.
At boot time the kernel will only use one description method depending on
parameters passed from the bootloader (including kernel bootargs).
Regardless of whether DT or ACPI is used, the kernel must always be capable
of booting with either scheme (in kernels with both schemes enabled at compile
time).
Booting using ACPI tables
-------------------------
The only defined method for passing ACPI tables to the kernel on ARMv8
is via the UEFI system configuration table. Just so it is explicit, this
means that ACPI is only supported on platforms that boot via UEFI.
When an ARMv8 system boots, it can either have DT information, ACPI tables,
or in some very unusual cases, both. If no command line parameters are used,
the kernel will try to use DT for device enumeration; if there is no DT
present, the kernel will try to use ACPI tables, but only if they are present.
In neither is available, the kernel will not boot. If acpi=force is used
on the command line, the kernel will attempt to use ACPI tables first, but
fall back to DT if there are no ACPI tables present. The basic idea is that
the kernel will not fail to boot unless it absolutely has no other choice.
Processing of ACPI tables may be disabled by passing acpi=off on the kernel
command line; this is the default behavior.
In order for the kernel to load and use ACPI tables, the UEFI implementation
MUST set the ACPI_20_TABLE_GUID to point to the RSDP table (the table with
the ACPI signature "RSD PTR "). If this pointer is incorrect and acpi=force
is used, the kernel will disable ACPI and try to use DT to boot instead; the
kernel has, in effect, determined that ACPI tables are not present at that
point.
If the pointer to the RSDP table is correct, the table will be mapped into
the kernel by the ACPI core, using the address provided by UEFI.
The ACPI core will then locate and map in all other ACPI tables provided by
using the addresses in the RSDP table to find the XSDT (eXtended System
Description Table). The XSDT in turn provides the addresses to all other
ACPI tables provided by the system firmware; the ACPI core will then traverse
this table and map in the tables listed.
The ACPI core will ignore any provided RSDT (Root System Description Table).
RSDTs have been deprecated and are ignored on arm64 since they only allow
for 32-bit addresses.
Further, the ACPI core will only use the 64-bit address fields in the FADT
(Fixed ACPI Description Table). Any 32-bit address fields in the FADT will
be ignored on arm64.
Hardware reduced mode (see Section 4.1 of the ACPI 5.1 specification) will
be enforced by the ACPI core on arm64. Doing so allows the ACPI core to
run less complex code since it no longer has to provide support for legacy
hardware from other architectures. Any fields that are not to be used for
hardware reduced mode must be set to zero.
For the ACPI core to operate properly, and in turn provide the information
the kernel needs to configure devices, it expects to find the following
tables (all section numbers refer to the ACPI 5.1 specfication):
-- RSDP (Root System Description Pointer), section 5.2.5
-- XSDT (eXtended System Description Table), section 5.2.8
-- FADT (Fixed ACPI Description Table), section 5.2.9
-- DSDT (Differentiated System Description Table), section
5.2.11.1
-- MADT (Multiple APIC Description Table), section 5.2.12
-- GTDT (Generic Timer Description Table), section 5.2.24
-- If PCI is supported, the MCFG (Memory mapped ConFiGuration
Table), section 5.2.6, specifically Table 5-31.
If the above tables are not all present, the kernel may or may not be
able to boot properly since it may not be able to configure all of the
devices available.
ACPI Detection
--------------
Drivers should determine their probe() type by checking for a null
value for ACPI_HANDLE, or checking .of_node, or other information in
the device structure. This is detailed further in the "Driver
Recommendations" section.
In non-driver code, if the presence of ACPI needs to be detected at
runtime, then check the value of acpi_disabled. If CONFIG_ACPI is not
set, acpi_disabled will always be 1.
Device Enumeration
------------------
Device descriptions in ACPI should use standard recognized ACPI interfaces.
These may contain less information than is typically provided via a Device
Tree description for the same device. This is also one of the reasons that
ACPI can be useful -- the driver takes into account that it may have less
detailed information about the device and uses sensible defaults instead.
If done properly in the driver, the hardware can change and improve over
time without the driver having to change at all.
Clocks provide an excellent example. In DT, clocks need to be specified
and the drivers need to take them into account. In ACPI, the assumption
is that UEFI will leave the device in a reasonable default state, including
any clock settings. If for some reason the driver needs to change a clock
value, this can be done in an ACPI method; all the driver needs to do is
invoke the method and not concern itself with what the method needs to do
to change the clock. Changing the hardware can then take place over time
by changing what the ACPI method does, and not the driver.
In DT, the parameters needed by the driver to set up clocks as in the example
above are known as "bindings"; in ACPI, these are known as "Device Properties"
and provided to a driver via the _DSD object.
ACPI tables are described with a formal language called ASL, the ACPI
Source Language (section 19 of the specification). This means that there
are always multiple ways to describe the same thing -- including device
properties. For example, device properties could use an ASL construct
that looks like this: Name(KEY0, "value0"). An ACPI device driver would
then retrieve the value of the property by evaluating the KEY0 object.
However, using Name() this way has multiple problems: (1) ACPI limits
names ("KEY0") to four characters unlike DT; (2) there is no industry
wide registry that maintains a list of names, minimzing re-use; (3)
there is also no registry for the definition of property values ("value0"),
again making re-use difficult; and (4) how does one maintain backward
compatibility as new hardware comes out? The _DSD method was created
to solve precisely these sorts of problems; Linux drivers should ALWAYS
use the _DSD method for device properties and nothing else.
The _DSM object (ACPI Section 9.14.1) could also be used for conveying
device properties to a driver. Linux drivers should only expect it to
be used if _DSD cannot represent the data required, and there is no way
to create a new UUID for the _DSD object. Note that there is even less
regulation of the use of _DSM than there is of _DSD. Drivers that depend
on the contents of _DSM objects will be more difficult to maintain over
time because of this; as of this writing, the use of _DSM is the cause
of quite a few firmware problems and is not recommended.
Drivers should look for device properties in the _DSD object ONLY; the _DSD
object is described in the ACPI specification section 6.2.5, but this only
describes how to define the structure of an object returned via _DSD, and
how specific data structures are defined by specific UUIDs. Linux should
only use the _DSD Device Properties UUID [5]:
-- UUID: daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301
-- http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/_DSD-device-properties-UUID.pdf
The UEFI Forum provides a mechanism for registering device properties [4]
so that they may be used across all operating systems supporting ACPI.
Device properties that have not been registered with the UEFI Forum should
not be used.
Before creating new device properties, check to be sure that they have not
been defined before and either registered in the Linux kernel documentation
as DT bindings, or the UEFI Forum as device properties. While we do not want
to simply move all DT bindings into ACPI device properties, we can learn from
what has been previously defined.
If it is necessary to define a new device property, or if it makes sense to
synthesize the definition of a binding so it can be used in any firmware,
both DT bindings and ACPI device properties for device drivers have review
processes. Use them both. When the driver itself is submitted for review
to the Linux mailing lists, the device property definitions needed must be
submitted at the same time. A driver that supports ACPI and uses device
properties will not be considered complete without their definitions. Once
the device property has been accepted by the Linux community, it must be
registered with the UEFI Forum [4], which will review it again for consistency
within the registry. This may require iteration. The UEFI Forum, though,
will always be the canonical site for device property definitions.
It may make sense to provide notice to the UEFI Forum that there is the
intent to register a previously unused device property name as a means of
reserving the name for later use. Other operating system vendors will
also be submitting registration requests and this may help smooth the
process.
Once registration and review have been completed, the kernel provides an
interface for looking up device properties in a manner independent of
whether DT or ACPI is being used. This API should be used [6]; it can
eliminate some duplication of code paths in driver probing functions and
discourage divergence between DT bindings and ACPI device properties.
Programmable Power Control Resources
------------------------------------
Programmable power control resources include such resources as voltage/current
providers (regulators) and clock sources.
With ACPI, the kernel clock and regulator framework is not expected to be used
at all.
The kernel assumes that power control of these resources is represented with
Power Resource Objects (ACPI section 7.1). The ACPI core will then handle
correctly enabling and disabling resources as they are needed. In order to
get that to work, ACPI assumes each device has defined D-states and that these
can be controlled through the optional ACPI methods _PS0, _PS1, _PS2, and _PS3;
in ACPI, _PS0 is the method to invoke to turn a device full on, and _PS3 is for
turning a device full off.
There are two options for using those Power Resources. They can:
-- be managed in a _PSx method which gets called on entry to power
state Dx.
-- be declared separately as power resources with their own _ON and _OFF
methods. They are then tied back to D-states for a particular device
via _PRx which specifies which power resources a device needs to be on
while in Dx. Kernel then tracks number of devices using a power resource
and calls _ON/_OFF as needed.
The kernel ACPI code will also assume that the _PSx methods follow the normal
ACPI rules for such methods:
-- If either _PS0 or _PS3 is implemented, then the other method must also
be implemented.
-- If a device requires usage or setup of a power resource when on, the ASL
should organize that it is allocated/enabled using the _PS0 method.
-- Resources allocated or enabled in the _PS0 method should be disabled
or de-allocated in the _PS3 method.
-- Firmware will leave the resources in a reasonable state before handing
over control to the kernel.
Such code in _PSx methods will of course be very platform specific. But,
this allows the driver to abstract out the interface for operating the device
and avoid having to read special non-standard values from ACPI tables. Further,
abstracting the use of these resources allows the hardware to change over time
without requiring updates to the driver.
Clocks
------
ACPI makes the assumption that clocks are initialized by the firmware --
UEFI, in this case -- to some working value before control is handed over
to the kernel. This has implications for devices such as UARTs, or SoC-driven
LCD displays, for example.
When the kernel boots, the clocks are assumed to be set to reasonable
working values. If for some reason the frequency needs to change -- e.g.,
throttling for power management -- the device driver should expect that
process to be abstracted out into some ACPI method that can be invoked
(please see the ACPI specification for further recommendations on standard
methods to be expected). The only exceptions to this are CPU clocks where
CPPC provides a much richer interface than ACPI methods. If the clocks
are not set, there is no direct way for Linux to control them.
If an SoC vendor wants to provide fine-grained control of the system clocks,
they could do so by providing ACPI methods that could be invoked by Linux
drivers. However, this is NOT recommended and Linux drivers should NOT use
such methods, even if they are provided. Such methods are not currently
standardized in the ACPI specification, and using them could tie a kernel
to a very specific SoC, or tie an SoC to a very specific version of the
kernel, both of which we are trying to avoid.
Driver Recommendations
----------------------
DO NOT remove any DT handling when adding ACPI support for a driver. The
same device may be used on many different systems.
DO try to structure the driver so that it is data-driven. That is, set up
a struct containing internal per-device state based on defaults and whatever
else must be discovered by the driver probe function. Then, have the rest
of the driver operate off of the contents of that struct. Doing so should
allow most divergence between ACPI and DT functionality to be kept local to
the probe function instead of being scattered throughout the driver. For
example:
static int device_probe_dt(struct platform_device *pdev)
{
/* DT specific functionality */
...
}
static int device_probe_acpi(struct platform_device *pdev)
{
/* ACPI specific functionality */
...
}
static int device_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
{
...
struct device_node node = pdev->dev.of_node;
...
if (node)
ret = device_probe_dt(pdev);
else if (ACPI_HANDLE(&pdev->dev))
ret = device_probe_acpi(pdev);
else
/* other initialization */
...
/* Continue with any generic probe operations */
...
}
DO keep the MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE entries together in the driver to make it
clear the different names the driver is probed for, both from DT and from
ACPI:
static struct of_device_id virtio_mmio_match[] = {
{ .compatible = "virtio,mmio", },
{ }
};
MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, virtio_mmio_match);
static const struct acpi_device_id virtio_mmio_acpi_match[] = {
{ "LNRO0005", },
{ }
};
MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(acpi, virtio_mmio_acpi_match);
ASWG
----
The ACPI specification changes regularly. During the year 2014, for instance,
version 5.1 was released and version 6.0 substantially completed, with most of
the changes being driven by ARM-specific requirements. Proposed changes are
presented and discussed in the ASWG (ACPI Specification Working Group) which
is a part of the UEFI Forum.
Participation in this group is open to all UEFI members. Please see
http://www.uefi.org/workinggroup for details on group membership.
It is the intent of the ARMv8 ACPI kernel code to follow the ACPI specification
as closely as possible, and to only implement functionality that complies with
the released standards from UEFI ASWG. As a practical matter, there will be
vendors that provide bad ACPI tables or violate the standards in some way.
If this is because of errors, quirks and fixups may be necessary, but will
be avoided if possible. If there are features missing from ACPI that preclude
it from being used on a platform, ECRs (Engineering Change Requests) should be
submitted to ASWG and go through the normal approval process; for those that
are not UEFI members, many other members of the Linux community are and would
likely be willing to assist in submitting ECRs.
Linux Code
----------
Individual items specific to Linux on ARM, contained in the the Linux
source code, are in the list that follows:
ACPI_OS_NAME This macro defines the string to be returned when
an ACPI method invokes the _OS method. On ARM64
systems, this macro will be "Linux" by default.
The command line parameter acpi_os=<string>
can be used to set it to some other value. The
default value for other architectures is "Microsoft
Windows NT", for example.
ACPI Objects
------------
Detailed expectations for ACPI tables and object are listed in the file
Documentation/arm64/acpi_object_usage.txt.
References
----------
[0] http://silver.arm.com -- document ARM-DEN-0029, or newer
"Server Base System Architecture", version 2.3, dated 27 Mar 2014
[1] http://infocenter.arm.com/help/topic/com.arm.doc.den0044a/Server_Base_Boot_Requirements.pdf
Document ARM-DEN-0044A, or newer: "Server Base Boot Requirements, System
Software on ARM Platforms", dated 16 Aug 2014
[2] http://www.secretlab.ca/archives/151, 10 Jan 2015, Copyright (c) 2015,
Linaro Ltd., written by Grant Likely. A copy of the verbatim text (apart
from formatting) is also in Documentation/arm64/why_use_acpi.txt.
[3] AMD ACPI for Seattle platform documentation:
http://amd-dev.wpengine.netdna-cdn.com/wordpress/media/2012/10/Seattle_ACPI_Guide.pdf
[4] http://www.uefi.org/acpi -- please see the link for the "ACPI _DSD Device
Property Registry Instructions"
[5] http://www.uefi.org/acpi -- please see the link for the "_DSD (Device
Specific Data) Implementation Guide"
[6] Kernel code for the unified device property interface can be found in
include/linux/property.h and drivers/base/property.c.
Authors
-------
Al Stone <al.stone@linaro.org>
Graeme Gregory <graeme.gregory@linaro.org>
Hanjun Guo <hanjun.guo@linaro.org>
Grant Likely <grant.likely@linaro.org>, for the "Why ACPI on ARM?" section

View File

@@ -201,11 +201,11 @@ These routines add 1 and subtract 1, respectively, from the given
atomic_t and return the new counter value after the operation is
performed.
Unlike the above routines, it is required that these primitives
include explicit memory barriers that are performed before and after
the operation. It must be done such that all memory operations before
and after the atomic operation calls are strongly ordered with respect
to the atomic operation itself.
Unlike the above routines, it is required that explicit memory
barriers are performed before and after the operation. It must be
done such that all memory operations before and after the atomic
operation calls are strongly ordered with respect to the atomic
operation itself.
For example, it should behave as if a smp_mb() call existed both
before and after the atomic operation.
@@ -233,21 +233,21 @@ These two routines increment and decrement by 1, respectively, the
given atomic counter. They return a boolean indicating whether the
resulting counter value was zero or not.
Again, these primitives provide explicit memory barrier semantics around
the atomic operation.
It requires explicit memory barrier semantics around the operation as
above.
int atomic_sub_and_test(int i, atomic_t *v);
This is identical to atomic_dec_and_test() except that an explicit
decrement is given instead of the implicit "1". This primitive must
provide explicit memory barrier semantics around the operation.
decrement is given instead of the implicit "1". It requires explicit
memory barrier semantics around the operation.
int atomic_add_negative(int i, atomic_t *v);
The given increment is added to the given atomic counter value. A boolean
is return which indicates whether the resulting counter value is negative.
This primitive must provide explicit memory barrier semantics around
the operation.
The given increment is added to the given atomic counter value. A
boolean is return which indicates whether the resulting counter value
is negative. It requires explicit memory barrier semantics around the
operation.
Then:
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ This performs an atomic exchange operation on the atomic variable v, setting
the given new value. It returns the old value that the atomic variable v had
just before the operation.
atomic_xchg must provide explicit memory barriers around the operation.
atomic_xchg requires explicit memory barriers around the operation.
int atomic_cmpxchg(atomic_t *v, int old, int new);
@@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ with the given old and new values. Like all atomic_xxx operations,
atomic_cmpxchg will only satisfy its atomicity semantics as long as all
other accesses of *v are performed through atomic_xxx operations.
atomic_cmpxchg must provide explicit memory barriers around the operation.
atomic_cmpxchg requires explicit memory barriers around the operation.
The semantics for atomic_cmpxchg are the same as those defined for 'cas'
below.
@@ -279,8 +279,8 @@ If the atomic value v is not equal to u, this function adds a to v, and
returns non zero. If v is equal to u then it returns zero. This is done as
an atomic operation.
atomic_add_unless must provide explicit memory barriers around the
operation unless it fails (returns 0).
atomic_add_unless requires explicit memory barriers around the operation
unless it fails (returns 0).
atomic_inc_not_zero, equivalent to atomic_add_unless(v, 1, 0)
@@ -460,9 +460,9 @@ the return value into an int. There are other places where things
like this occur as well.
These routines, like the atomic_t counter operations returning values,
must provide explicit memory barrier semantics around their execution.
All memory operations before the atomic bit operation call must be
made visible globally before the atomic bit operation is made visible.
require explicit memory barrier semantics around their execution. All
memory operations before the atomic bit operation call must be made
visible globally before the atomic bit operation is made visible.
Likewise, the atomic bit operation must be visible globally before any
subsequent memory operation is made visible. For example:
@@ -536,9 +536,8 @@ except that two underscores are prefixed to the interface name.
These non-atomic variants also do not require any special memory
barrier semantics.
The routines xchg() and cmpxchg() must provide the same exact
memory-barrier semantics as the atomic and bit operations returning
values.
The routines xchg() and cmpxchg() need the same exact memory barriers
as the atomic and bit operations returning values.
Spinlocks and rwlocks have memory barrier expectations as well.
The rule to follow is simple:

View File

@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
ifneq ($(CONFIG_BLACKFIN),)
ifneq ($(CONFIG_BFIN_GPTIMERS),)
ifneq ($(CONFIG_BFIN_GPTIMERS,)
obj-m := gptimers-example.o
endif
endif

View File

@@ -48,7 +48,8 @@ Description of Contents:
- Highmem I/O support
- I/O scheduler modularization
1.2 Tuning based on high level requirements/capabilities
1.2.1 Request Priority/Latency
1.2.1 I/O Barriers
1.2.2 Request Priority/Latency
1.3 Direct access/bypass to lower layers for diagnostics and special
device operations
1.3.1 Pre-built commands
@@ -254,12 +255,29 @@ some control over i/o ordering.
What kind of support exists at the generic block layer for this ?
The flags and rw fields in the bio structure can be used for some tuning
from above e.g indicating that an i/o is just a readahead request, or priority
settings (currently unused). As far as user applications are concerned they
would need an additional mechanism either via open flags or ioctls, or some
other upper level mechanism to communicate such settings to block.
from above e.g indicating that an i/o is just a readahead request, or for
marking barrier requests (discussed next), or priority settings (currently
unused). As far as user applications are concerned they would need an
additional mechanism either via open flags or ioctls, or some other upper
level mechanism to communicate such settings to block.
1.2.1 Request Priority/Latency
1.2.1 I/O Barriers
There is a way to enforce strict ordering for i/os through barriers.
All requests before a barrier point must be serviced before the barrier
request and any other requests arriving after the barrier will not be
serviced until after the barrier has completed. This is useful for higher
level control on write ordering, e.g flushing a log of committed updates
to disk before the corresponding updates themselves.
A flag in the bio structure, BIO_BARRIER is used to identify a barrier i/o.
The generic i/o scheduler would make sure that it places the barrier request and
all other requests coming after it after all the previous requests in the
queue. Barriers may be implemented in different ways depending on the
driver. For more details regarding I/O barriers, please read barrier.txt
in this directory.
1.2.2 Request Priority/Latency
Todo/Under discussion:
Arjan's proposed request priority scheme allows higher levels some broad
@@ -888,8 +906,8 @@ queue and specific I/O schedulers. Unless stated otherwise, elevator is used
to refer to both parts and I/O scheduler to specific I/O schedulers.
Block layer implements generic dispatch queue in block/*.c.
The generic dispatch queue is responsible for requeueing, handling non-fs
requests and all other subtleties.
The generic dispatch queue is responsible for properly ordering barrier
requests, requeueing, handling non-fs requests and all other subtleties.
Specific I/O schedulers are responsible for ordering normal filesystem
requests. They can also choose to delay certain requests to improve

View File

@@ -1,31 +1,17 @@
Network Block Device (TCP version)
==================================
Network Block Device (TCP version)
What is it: With this compiled in the kernel (or as a module), Linux
can use a remote server as one of its block devices. So every time
the client computer wants to read, e.g., /dev/nb0, it sends a
request over TCP to the server, which will reply with the data read.
This can be used for stations with low disk space (or even diskless)
to borrow disk space from another computer.
Unlike NFS, it is possible to put any filesystem on it, etc.
1) Overview
-----------
What is it: With this compiled in the kernel (or as a module), Linux
can use a remote server as one of its block devices. So every time
the client computer wants to read, e.g., /dev/nb0, it sends a
request over TCP to the server, which will reply with the data read.
This can be used for stations with low disk space (or even diskless)
to borrow disk space from another computer.
Unlike NFS, it is possible to put any filesystem on it, etc.
For more information, or to download the nbd-client and nbd-server
tools, go to http://nbd.sf.net/.
The nbd kernel module need only be installed on the client
system, as the nbd-server is completely in userspace. In fact,
the nbd-server has been successfully ported to other operating
systems, including Windows.
A) NBD parameters
-----------------
max_part
Number of partitions per device (default: 0).
nbds_max
Number of block devices that should be initialized (default: 16).
For more information, or to download the nbd-client and nbd-server
tools, go to http://nbd.sf.net/.
The nbd kernel module need only be installed on the client
system, as the nbd-server is completely in userspace. In fact,
the nbd-server has been successfully ported to other operating
systems, including Windows.

View File

@@ -98,79 +98,20 @@ size of the disk when not in use so a huge zram is wasteful.
mount /dev/zram1 /tmp
7) Stats:
Per-device statistics are exported as various nodes under /sys/block/zram<id>/
A brief description of exported device attritbutes. For more details please
read Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram.
Name access description
---- ------ -----------
disksize RW show and set the device's disk size
initstate RO shows the initialization state of the device
reset WO trigger device reset
num_reads RO the number of reads
failed_reads RO the number of failed reads
num_write RO the number of writes
failed_writes RO the number of failed writes
invalid_io RO the number of non-page-size-aligned I/O requests
max_comp_streams RW the number of possible concurrent compress operations
comp_algorithm RW show and change the compression algorithm
notify_free RO the number of notifications to free pages (either
slot free notifications or REQ_DISCARD requests)
zero_pages RO the number of zero filled pages written to this disk
orig_data_size RO uncompressed size of data stored in this disk
compr_data_size RO compressed size of data stored in this disk
mem_used_total RO the amount of memory allocated for this disk
mem_used_max RW the maximum amount memory zram have consumed to
store compressed data
mem_limit RW the maximum amount of memory ZRAM can use to store
the compressed data
num_migrated RO the number of objects migrated migrated by compaction
WARNING
=======
per-stat sysfs attributes are considered to be deprecated.
The basic strategy is:
-- the existing RW nodes will be downgraded to WO nodes (in linux 4.11)
-- deprecated RO sysfs nodes will eventually be removed (in linux 4.11)
The list of deprecated attributes can be found here:
Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-block-zram
Basically, every attribute that has its own read accessible sysfs node
(e.g. num_reads) *AND* is accessible via one of the stat files (zram<id>/stat
or zram<id>/io_stat or zram<id>/mm_stat) is considered to be deprecated.
User space is advised to use the following files to read the device statistics.
File /sys/block/zram<id>/stat
Represents block layer statistics. Read Documentation/block/stat.txt for
details.
File /sys/block/zram<id>/io_stat
The stat file represents device's I/O statistics not accounted by block
layer and, thus, not available in zram<id>/stat file. It consists of a
single line of text and contains the following stats separated by
whitespace:
failed_reads
failed_writes
invalid_io
notify_free
File /sys/block/zram<id>/mm_stat
The stat file represents device's mm statistics. It consists of a single
line of text and contains the following stats separated by whitespace:
orig_data_size
compr_data_size
mem_used_total
mem_limit
mem_used_max
zero_pages
num_migrated
Per-device statistics are exported as various nodes under
/sys/block/zram<id>/
disksize
num_reads
num_writes
failed_reads
failed_writes
invalid_io
notify_free
zero_pages
orig_data_size
compr_data_size
mem_used_total
mem_used_max
8) Deactivate:
swapoff /dev/zram0

View File

@@ -392,10 +392,8 @@ Put simply, it costs less to balance between two smaller sched domains
than one big one, but doing so means that overloads in one of the
two domains won't be load balanced to the other one.
By default, there is one sched domain covering all CPUs, including those
marked isolated using the kernel boot time "isolcpus=" argument. However,
the isolated CPUs will not participate in load balancing, and will not
have tasks running on them unless explicitly assigned.
By default, there is one sched domain covering all CPUs, except those
marked isolated using the kernel boot time "isolcpus=" argument.
This default load balancing across all CPUs is not well suited for
the following two situations:
@@ -467,10 +465,6 @@ such partially load balanced cpusets, as they may be artificially
constrained to some subset of the CPUs allowed to them, for lack of
load balancing to the other CPUs.
CPUs in "cpuset.isolcpus" were excluded from load balancing by the
isolcpus= kernel boot option, and will never be load balanced regardless
of the value of "cpuset.sched_load_balance" in any cpuset.
1.7.1 sched_load_balance implementation details.
------------------------------------------------

View File

@@ -275,6 +275,11 @@ When oom event notifier is registered, event will be delivered.
2.7 Kernel Memory Extension (CONFIG_MEMCG_KMEM)
WARNING: Current implementation lacks reclaim support. That means allocation
attempts will fail when close to the limit even if there are plenty of
kmem available for reclaim. That makes this option unusable in real
life so DO NOT SELECT IT unless for development purposes.
With the Kernel memory extension, the Memory Controller is able to limit
the amount of kernel memory used by the system. Kernel memory is fundamentally
different than user memory, since it can't be swapped out, which makes it
@@ -340,9 +345,6 @@ set:
In this case, the admin could set up K so that the sum of all groups is
never greater than the total memory, and freely set U at the cost of his
QoS.
WARNING: In the current implementation, memory reclaim will NOT be
triggered for a cgroup when it hits K while staying below U, which makes
this setup impractical.
U != 0, K >= U:
Since kmem charges will also be fed to the user counter and reclaim will be

View File

@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
The CMA debugfs interface is useful to retrieve basic information out of the
different CMA areas and to test allocation/release in each of the areas.
Each CMA zone represents a directory under <debugfs>/cma/, indexed by the
kernel's CMA index. So the first CMA zone would be:
<debugfs>/cma/cma-0
The structure of the files created under that directory is as follows:
- [RO] base_pfn: The base PFN (Page Frame Number) of the zone.
- [RO] count: Amount of memory in the CMA area.
- [RO] order_per_bit: Order of pages represented by one bit.
- [RO] bitmap: The bitmap of page states in the zone.
- [WO] alloc: Allocate N pages from that CMA area. For example:
echo 5 > <debugfs>/cma/cma-2/alloc
would try to allocate 5 pages from the cma-2 area.
- [WO] free: Free N pages from that CMA area, similar to the above.

View File

@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Never use anything other than cpumask_t to represent bitmap of CPUs.
for_each_possible_cpu - Iterate over cpu_possible_mask
for_each_online_cpu - Iterate over cpu_online_mask
for_each_present_cpu - Iterate over cpu_present_mask
for_each_cpu(x,mask) - Iterate over some random collection of cpu mask.
for_each_cpu_mask(x,mask) - Iterate over some random collection of cpu mask.
#include <linux/cpu.h>
get_online_cpus() and put_online_cpus():

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
Introduction
============
The concepts of the kernel crypto API visible to kernel space is fully
applicable to the user space interface as well. Therefore, the kernel crypto API
high level discussion for the in-kernel use cases applies here as well.
The major difference, however, is that user space can only act as a consumer
and never as a provider of a transformation or cipher algorithm.
The following covers the user space interface exported by the kernel crypto
API. A working example of this description is libkcapi that can be obtained from
[1]. That library can be used by user space applications that require
cryptographic services from the kernel.
Some details of the in-kernel kernel crypto API aspects do not
apply to user space, however. This includes the difference between synchronous
and asynchronous invocations. The user space API call is fully synchronous.
In addition, only a subset of all cipher types are available as documented
below.
User space API general remarks
==============================
The kernel crypto API is accessible from user space. Currently, the following
ciphers are accessible:
* Message digest including keyed message digest (HMAC, CMAC)
* Symmetric ciphers
Note, AEAD ciphers are currently not supported via the symmetric cipher
interface.
The interface is provided via Netlink using the type AF_ALG. In addition, the
setsockopt option type is SOL_ALG. In case the user space header files do not
export these flags yet, use the following macros:
#ifndef AF_ALG
#define AF_ALG 38
#endif
#ifndef SOL_ALG
#define SOL_ALG 279
#endif
A cipher is accessed with the same name as done for the in-kernel API calls.
This includes the generic vs. unique naming schema for ciphers as well as the
enforcement of priorities for generic names.
To interact with the kernel crypto API, a Netlink socket must be created by
the user space application. User space invokes the cipher operation with the
send/write system call family. The result of the cipher operation is obtained
with the read/recv system call family.
The following API calls assume that the Netlink socket descriptor is already
opened by the user space application and discusses only the kernel crypto API
specific invocations.
To initialize a Netlink interface, the following sequence has to be performed
by the consumer:
1. Create a socket of type AF_ALG with the struct sockaddr_alg parameter
specified below for the different cipher types.
2. Invoke bind with the socket descriptor
3. Invoke accept with the socket descriptor. The accept system call
returns a new file descriptor that is to be used to interact with
the particular cipher instance. When invoking send/write or recv/read
system calls to send data to the kernel or obtain data from the
kernel, the file descriptor returned by accept must be used.
In-place cipher operation
=========================
Just like the in-kernel operation of the kernel crypto API, the user space
interface allows the cipher operation in-place. That means that the input buffer
used for the send/write system call and the output buffer used by the read/recv
system call may be one and the same. This is of particular interest for
symmetric cipher operations where a copying of the output data to its final
destination can be avoided.
If a consumer on the other hand wants to maintain the plaintext and the
ciphertext in different memory locations, all a consumer needs to do is to
provide different memory pointers for the encryption and decryption operation.
Message digest API
==================
The message digest type to be used for the cipher operation is selected when
invoking the bind syscall. bind requires the caller to provide a filled
struct sockaddr data structure. This data structure must be filled as follows:
struct sockaddr_alg sa = {
.salg_family = AF_ALG,
.salg_type = "hash", /* this selects the hash logic in the kernel */
.salg_name = "sha1" /* this is the cipher name */
};
The salg_type value "hash" applies to message digests and keyed message digests.
Though, a keyed message digest is referenced by the appropriate salg_name.
Please see below for the setsockopt interface that explains how the key can be
set for a keyed message digest.
Using the send() system call, the application provides the data that should be
processed with the message digest. The send system call allows the following
flags to be specified:
* MSG_MORE: If this flag is set, the send system call acts like a
message digest update function where the final hash is not
yet calculated. If the flag is not set, the send system call
calculates the final message digest immediately.
With the recv() system call, the application can read the message digest from
the kernel crypto API. If the buffer is too small for the message digest, the
flag MSG_TRUNC is set by the kernel.
In order to set a message digest key, the calling application must use the
setsockopt() option of ALG_SET_KEY. If the key is not set the HMAC operation is
performed without the initial HMAC state change caused by the key.
Symmetric cipher API
====================
The operation is very similar to the message digest discussion. During
initialization, the struct sockaddr data structure must be filled as follows:
struct sockaddr_alg sa = {
.salg_family = AF_ALG,
.salg_type = "skcipher", /* this selects the symmetric cipher */
.salg_name = "cbc(aes)" /* this is the cipher name */
};
Before data can be sent to the kernel using the write/send system call family,
the consumer must set the key. The key setting is described with the setsockopt
invocation below.
Using the sendmsg() system call, the application provides the data that should
be processed for encryption or decryption. In addition, the IV is specified
with the data structure provided by the sendmsg() system call.
The sendmsg system call parameter of struct msghdr is embedded into the
struct cmsghdr data structure. See recv(2) and cmsg(3) for more information
on how the cmsghdr data structure is used together with the send/recv system
call family. That cmsghdr data structure holds the following information
specified with a separate header instances:
* specification of the cipher operation type with one of these flags:
ALG_OP_ENCRYPT - encryption of data
ALG_OP_DECRYPT - decryption of data
* specification of the IV information marked with the flag ALG_SET_IV
The send system call family allows the following flag to be specified:
* MSG_MORE: If this flag is set, the send system call acts like a
cipher update function where more input data is expected
with a subsequent invocation of the send system call.
Note: The kernel reports -EINVAL for any unexpected data. The caller must
make sure that all data matches the constraints given in /proc/crypto for the
selected cipher.
With the recv() system call, the application can read the result of the
cipher operation from the kernel crypto API. The output buffer must be at least
as large as to hold all blocks of the encrypted or decrypted data. If the output
data size is smaller, only as many blocks are returned that fit into that
output buffer size.
Setsockopt interface
====================
In addition to the read/recv and send/write system call handling to send and
retrieve data subject to the cipher operation, a consumer also needs to set
the additional information for the cipher operation. This additional information
is set using the setsockopt system call that must be invoked with the file
descriptor of the open cipher (i.e. the file descriptor returned by the
accept system call).
Each setsockopt invocation must use the level SOL_ALG.
The setsockopt interface allows setting the following data using the mentioned
optname:
* ALG_SET_KEY -- Setting the key. Key setting is applicable to:
- the skcipher cipher type (symmetric ciphers)
- the hash cipher type (keyed message digests)
User space API example
======================
Please see [1] for libkcapi which provides an easy-to-use wrapper around the
aforementioned Netlink kernel interface. [1] also contains a test application
that invokes all libkcapi API calls.
[1] http://www.chronox.de/libkcapi.html
Author
======
Stephan Mueller <smueller@chronox.de>

View File

@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Device-Mapper's "crypt" target provides transparent encryption of block devices
using the kernel crypto API.
For a more detailed description of supported parameters see:
https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/cryptsetup/wikis/DMCrypt
http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/wiki/DMCrypt
Parameters: <cipher> <key> <iv_offset> <device path> \
<offset> [<#opt_params> <opt_params>]
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Example scripts
===============
LUKS (Linux Unified Key Setup) is now the preferred way to set up disk
encryption with dm-crypt using the 'cryptsetup' utility, see
https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/cryptsetup
http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/
[[
#!/bin/sh

View File

@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
dm-log-writes
=============
This target takes 2 devices, one to pass all IO to normally, and one to log all
of the write operations to. This is intended for file system developers wishing
to verify the integrity of metadata or data as the file system is written to.
There is a log_write_entry written for every WRITE request and the target is
able to take arbitrary data from userspace to insert into the log. The data
that is in the WRITE requests is copied into the log to make the replay happen
exactly as it happened originally.
Log Ordering
============
We log things in order of completion once we are sure the write is no longer in
cache. This means that normal WRITE requests are not actually logged until the
next REQ_FLUSH request. This is to make it easier for userspace to replay the
log in a way that correlates to what is on disk and not what is in cache, to
make it easier to detect improper waiting/flushing.
This works by attaching all WRITE requests to a list once the write completes.
Once we see a REQ_FLUSH request we splice this list onto the request and once
the FLUSH request completes we log all of the WRITEs and then the FLUSH. Only
completed WRITEs, at the time the REQ_FLUSH is issued, are added in order to
simulate the worst case scenario with regard to power failures. Consider the
following example (W means write, C means complete):
W1,W2,W3,C3,C2,Wflush,C1,Cflush
The log would show the following
W3,W2,flush,W1....
Again this is to simulate what is actually on disk, this allows us to detect
cases where a power failure at a particular point in time would create an
inconsistent file system.
Any REQ_FUA requests bypass this flushing mechanism and are logged as soon as
they complete as those requests will obviously bypass the device cache.
Any REQ_DISCARD requests are treated like WRITE requests. Otherwise we would
have all the DISCARD requests, and then the WRITE requests and then the FLUSH
request. Consider the following example:
WRITE block 1, DISCARD block 1, FLUSH
If we logged DISCARD when it completed, the replay would look like this
DISCARD 1, WRITE 1, FLUSH
which isn't quite what happened and wouldn't be caught during the log replay.
Target interface
================
i) Constructor
log-writes <dev_path> <log_dev_path>
dev_path : Device that all of the IO will go to normally.
log_dev_path : Device where the log entries are written to.
ii) Status
<#logged entries> <highest allocated sector>
#logged entries : Number of logged entries
highest allocated sector : Highest allocated sector
iii) Messages
mark <description>
You can use a dmsetup message to set an arbitrary mark in a log.
For example say you want to fsck a file system after every
write, but first you need to replay up to the mkfs to make sure
we're fsck'ing something reasonable, you would do something like
this:
mkfs.btrfs -f /dev/mapper/log
dmsetup message log 0 mark mkfs
<run test>
This would allow you to replay the log up to the mkfs mark and
then replay from that point on doing the fsck check in the
interval that you want.
Every log has a mark at the end labeled "dm-log-writes-end".
Userspace component
===================
There is a userspace tool that will replay the log for you in various ways.
It can be found here: https://github.com/josefbacik/log-writes
Example usage
=============
Say you want to test fsync on your file system. You would do something like
this:
TABLE="0 $(blockdev --getsz /dev/sdb) log-writes /dev/sdb /dev/sdc"
dmsetup create log --table "$TABLE"
mkfs.btrfs -f /dev/mapper/log
dmsetup message log 0 mark mkfs
mount /dev/mapper/log /mnt/btrfs-test
<some test that does fsync at the end>
dmsetup message log 0 mark fsync
md5sum /mnt/btrfs-test/foo
umount /mnt/btrfs-test
dmsetup remove log
replay-log --log /dev/sdc --replay /dev/sdb --end-mark fsync
mount /dev/sdb /mnt/btrfs-test
md5sum /mnt/btrfs-test/foo
<verify md5sum's are correct>
Another option is to do a complicated file system operation and verify the file
system is consistent during the entire operation. You could do this with:
TABLE="0 $(blockdev --getsz /dev/sdb) log-writes /dev/sdb /dev/sdc"
dmsetup create log --table "$TABLE"
mkfs.btrfs -f /dev/mapper/log
dmsetup message log 0 mark mkfs
mount /dev/mapper/log /mnt/btrfs-test
<fsstress to dirty the fs>
btrfs filesystem balance /mnt/btrfs-test
umount /mnt/btrfs-test
dmsetup remove log
replay-log --log /dev/sdc --replay /dev/sdb --end-mark mkfs
btrfsck /dev/sdb
replay-log --log /dev/sdc --replay /dev/sdb --start-mark mkfs \
--fsck "btrfsck /dev/sdb" --check fua
And that will replay the log until it sees a FUA request, run the fsck command
and if the fsck passes it will replay to the next FUA, until it is completed or
the fsck command exists abnormally.

View File

@@ -47,8 +47,8 @@ consume far too much memory.
Using this device-mapper switch target we can now build a two-layer
device hierarchy:
Upper Tier - Determine which array member the I/O should be sent to.
Lower Tier - Load balance amongst paths to a particular member.
Upper Tier Determine which array member the I/O should be sent to.
Lower Tier Load balance amongst paths to a particular member.
The lower tier consists of a single dm multipath device for each member.
Each of these multipath devices contains the set of paths directly to

View File

@@ -380,6 +380,9 @@ then you'll have no access to blocks mapped beyond the end. If you
load a target that is bigger than before, then extra blocks will be
provisioned as and when needed.
If you wish to reduce the size of your thin device and potentially
regain some space then send the 'trim' message to the pool.
ii) Status
<nr mapped sectors> <highest mapped sector>

View File

@@ -11,7 +11,6 @@ Construction Parameters
<data_block_size> <hash_block_size>
<num_data_blocks> <hash_start_block>
<algorithm> <digest> <salt>
[<#opt_params> <opt_params>]
<version>
This is the type of the on-disk hash format.
@@ -63,22 +62,6 @@ Construction Parameters
<salt>
The hexadecimal encoding of the salt value.
<#opt_params>
Number of optional parameters. If there are no optional parameters,
the optional paramaters section can be skipped or #opt_params can be zero.
Otherwise #opt_params is the number of following arguments.
Example of optional parameters section:
1 ignore_corruption
ignore_corruption
Log corrupted blocks, but allow read operations to proceed normally.
restart_on_corruption
Restart the system when a corrupted block is discovered. This option is
not compatible with ignore_corruption and requires user space support to
avoid restart loops.
Theory of operation
===================
@@ -142,7 +125,7 @@ block boundary) are the hash blocks which are stored a depth at a time
The full specification of kernel parameters and on-disk metadata format
is available at the cryptsetup project's wiki page
https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/cryptsetup/wikis/DMVerity
http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/wiki/DMVerity
Status
======
@@ -159,7 +142,7 @@ Set up a device:
A command line tool veritysetup is available to compute or verify
the hash tree or activate the kernel device. This is available from
the cryptsetup upstream repository https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/cryptsetup/
the cryptsetup upstream repository http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/
(as a libcryptsetup extension).
Create hash on the device:

View File

@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
* ARC Performance Counters
The ARC700 can be configured with a pipeline performance monitor for counting
CPU and cache events like cache misses and hits. Like conventional PCT there
are 100+ hardware conditions dynamically mapped to upto 32 counters
Note that:
* The ARC 700 PCT does not support interrupts; although HW events may be
counted, the HW events themselves cannot serve as a trigger for a sample.
Required properties:
- compatible : should contain
"snps,arc700-pct"
Example:
pmu {
compatible = "snps,arc700-pct";
};

View File

@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
* ARC Performance Monitor Unit
The ARC 700 can be configured with a pipeline performance monitor for counting
CPU and cache events like cache misses and hits.
Note that:
* ARC 700 refers to a family of ARC processor cores;
- There is only one type of PMU available for the whole family;
- The PMU may support different sets of events; supported events are probed
at boot time, as required by the reference manual.
* The ARC 700 PMU does not support interrupts; although HW events may be
counted, the HW events themselves cannot serve as a trigger for a sample.
Required properties:
- compatible : should contain
"snps,arc700-pmu"
Example:
pmu {
compatible = "snps,arc700-pmu";
};

View File

@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
Annapurna Labs Alpine Platform Device Tree Bindings
---------------------------------------------------------------
Boards in the Alpine family shall have the following properties:
* Required root node properties:
compatible: must contain "al,alpine"
* Example:
/ {
model = "Annapurna Labs Alpine Dev Board";
compatible = "al,alpine";
...
}
* CPU node:
The Alpine platform includes cortex-a15 cores.
enable-method: must be "al,alpine-smp" to allow smp [1]
Example:
cpus {
#address-cells = <1>;
#size-cells = <0>;
enable-method = "al,alpine-smp";
cpu@0 {
compatible = "arm,cortex-a15";
device_type = "cpu";
reg = <0>;
};
cpu@1 {
compatible = "arm,cortex-a15";
device_type = "cpu";
reg = <1>;
};
cpu@2 {
compatible = "arm,cortex-a15";
device_type = "cpu";
reg = <2>;
};
cpu@3 {
compatible = "arm,cortex-a15";
device_type = "cpu";
reg = <3>;
};
};
* Alpine CPU resume registers
The CPU resume register are used to define required resume address after
reset.
Properties:
- compatible : Should contain "al,alpine-cpu-resume".
- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
Example:
cpu_resume {
compatible = "al,alpine-cpu-resume";
reg = <0xfbff5ed0 0x30>;
};
* Alpine System-Fabric Service Registers
The System-Fabric Service Registers allow various operation on CPU and
system fabric, like powering CPUs off.
Properties:
- compatible : Should contain "al,alpine-sysfabric-service" and "syscon".
- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
Example:
nb_service {
compatible = "al,alpine-sysfabric-service", "syscon";
reg = <0xfb070000 0x10000>;
};
[1] arm/cpu-enable-method/al,alpine-smp

View File

@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
Altera's SoCFPGA platform device tree bindings
---------------------------------------------
Boards with Cyclone 5 SoC:
Required root node properties:
compatible = "altr,socfpga-cyclone5", "altr,socfpga";
Boards with Arria 5 SoC:
Required root node properties:
compatible = "altr,socfpga-arria5", "altr,socfpga";
Boards with Arria 10 SoC:
Required root node properties:
compatible = "altr,socfpga-arria10", "altr,socfpga";

View File

@@ -8,7 +8,3 @@ Boards with the Amlogic Meson6 SoC shall have the following properties:
Boards with the Amlogic Meson8 SoC shall have the following properties:
Required root node property:
compatible: "amlogic,meson8";
Board compatible values:
- "geniatech,atv1200"
- "minix,neo-x8"

View File

@@ -17,10 +17,7 @@ to deliver its interrupts via SPIs.
- interrupts : Interrupt list for secure, non-secure, virtual and
hypervisor timers, in that order.
- clock-frequency : The frequency of the main counter, in Hz. Should be present
only where necessary to work around broken firmware which does not configure
CNTFRQ on all CPUs to a uniform correct value. Use of this property is
strongly discouraged; fix your firmware unless absolutely impossible.
- clock-frequency : The frequency of the main counter, in Hz. Optional.
- always-on : a boolean property. If present, the timer is powered through an
always-on power domain, therefore it never loses context.
@@ -49,8 +46,7 @@ Example:
- compatible : Should at least contain "arm,armv7-timer-mem".
- clock-frequency : The frequency of the main counter, in Hz. Should be present
only when firmware has not configured the MMIO CNTFRQ registers.
- clock-frequency : The frequency of the main counter, in Hz. Optional.
- reg : The control frame base address.

View File

@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
Marvell Armada 39x Platforms Device Tree Bindings
-------------------------------------------------
Boards with a SoC of the Marvell Armada 39x family shall have the
following property:
Required root node property:
- compatible: must contain "marvell,armada390"
In addition, boards using the Marvell Armada 398 SoC shall have the
following property before the previous one:
Required root node property:
compatible: must contain "marvell,armada398"
Example:
compatible = "marvell,a398-db", "marvell,armada398", "marvell,armada390";

View File

@@ -46,12 +46,10 @@ PIT Timer required properties:
shared across all System Controller members.
System Timer (ST) required properties:
- compatible: Should be "atmel,at91rm9200-st", "syscon", "simple-mfd"
- compatible: Should be "atmel,at91rm9200-st"
- reg: Should contain registers location and length
- interrupts: Should contain interrupt for the ST which is the IRQ line
shared across all System Controller members.
Its subnodes can be:
- watchdog: compatible should be "atmel,at91rm9200-wdt"
TC/TCLIB Timer required properties:
- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-tcb".

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More